OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc/openrisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc

[/] [openrisc/] [trunk/] [gnu-old/] [gcc-4.2.2/] [gcc/] [doc/] [md.texi] - Blame information for rev 823

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 38 julius
@c Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
2
@c 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3
@c This is part of the GCC manual.
4
@c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
5
 
6
@ifset INTERNALS
7
@node Machine Desc
8
@chapter Machine Descriptions
9
@cindex machine descriptions
10
 
11
A machine description has two parts: a file of instruction patterns
12
(@file{.md} file) and a C header file of macro definitions.
13
 
14
The @file{.md} file for a target machine contains a pattern for each
15
instruction that the target machine supports (or at least each instruction
16
that is worth telling the compiler about).  It may also contain comments.
17
A semicolon causes the rest of the line to be a comment, unless the semicolon
18
is inside a quoted string.
19
 
20
See the next chapter for information on the C header file.
21
 
22
@menu
23
* Overview::            How the machine description is used.
24
* Patterns::            How to write instruction patterns.
25
* Example::             An explained example of a @code{define_insn} pattern.
26
* RTL Template::        The RTL template defines what insns match a pattern.
27
* Output Template::     The output template says how to make assembler code
28
                          from such an insn.
29
* Output Statement::    For more generality, write C code to output
30
                          the assembler code.
31
* Predicates::          Controlling what kinds of operands can be used
32
                          for an insn.
33
* Constraints::         Fine-tuning operand selection.
34
* Standard Names::      Names mark patterns to use for code generation.
35
* Pattern Ordering::    When the order of patterns makes a difference.
36
* Dependent Patterns::  Having one pattern may make you need another.
37
* Jump Patterns::       Special considerations for patterns for jump insns.
38
* Looping Patterns::    How to define patterns for special looping insns.
39
* Insn Canonicalizations::Canonicalization of Instructions
40
* Expander Definitions::Generating a sequence of several RTL insns
41
                          for a standard operation.
42
* Insn Splitting::      Splitting Instructions into Multiple Instructions.
43
* Including Patterns::      Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions.
44
* Peephole Definitions::Defining machine-specific peephole optimizations.
45
* Insn Attributes::     Specifying the value of attributes for generated insns.
46
* Conditional Execution::Generating @code{define_insn} patterns for
47
                           predication.
48
* Constant Definitions::Defining symbolic constants that can be used in the
49
                        md file.
50
* Macros::              Using macros to generate patterns from a template.
51
@end menu
52
 
53
@node Overview
54
@section Overview of How the Machine Description is Used
55
 
56
There are three main conversions that happen in the compiler:
57
 
58
@enumerate
59
 
60
@item
61
The front end reads the source code and builds a parse tree.
62
 
63
@item
64
The parse tree is used to generate an RTL insn list based on named
65
instruction patterns.
66
 
67
@item
68
The insn list is matched against the RTL templates to produce assembler
69
code.
70
 
71
@end enumerate
72
 
73
For the generate pass, only the names of the insns matter, from either a
74
named @code{define_insn} or a @code{define_expand}.  The compiler will
75
choose the pattern with the right name and apply the operands according
76
to the documentation later in this chapter, without regard for the RTL
77
template or operand constraints.  Note that the names the compiler looks
78
for are hard-coded in the compiler---it will ignore unnamed patterns and
79
patterns with names it doesn't know about, but if you don't provide a
80
named pattern it needs, it will abort.
81
 
82
If a @code{define_insn} is used, the template given is inserted into the
83
insn list.  If a @code{define_expand} is used, one of three things
84
happens, based on the condition logic.  The condition logic may manually
85
create new insns for the insn list, say via @code{emit_insn()}, and
86
invoke @code{DONE}.  For certain named patterns, it may invoke @code{FAIL} to tell the
87
compiler to use an alternate way of performing that task.  If it invokes
88
neither @code{DONE} nor @code{FAIL}, the template given in the pattern
89
is inserted, as if the @code{define_expand} were a @code{define_insn}.
90
 
91
Once the insn list is generated, various optimization passes convert,
92
replace, and rearrange the insns in the insn list.  This is where the
93
@code{define_split} and @code{define_peephole} patterns get used, for
94
example.
95
 
96
Finally, the insn list's RTL is matched up with the RTL templates in the
97
@code{define_insn} patterns, and those patterns are used to emit the
98
final assembly code.  For this purpose, each named @code{define_insn}
99
acts like it's unnamed, since the names are ignored.
100
 
101
@node Patterns
102
@section Everything about Instruction Patterns
103
@cindex patterns
104
@cindex instruction patterns
105
 
106
@findex define_insn
107
Each instruction pattern contains an incomplete RTL expression, with pieces
108
to be filled in later, operand constraints that restrict how the pieces can
109
be filled in, and an output pattern or C code to generate the assembler
110
output, all wrapped up in a @code{define_insn} expression.
111
 
112
A @code{define_insn} is an RTL expression containing four or five operands:
113
 
114
@enumerate
115
@item
116
An optional name.  The presence of a name indicate that this instruction
117
pattern can perform a certain standard job for the RTL-generation
118
pass of the compiler.  This pass knows certain names and will use
119
the instruction patterns with those names, if the names are defined
120
in the machine description.
121
 
122
The absence of a name is indicated by writing an empty string
123
where the name should go.  Nameless instruction patterns are never
124
used for generating RTL code, but they may permit several simpler insns
125
to be combined later on.
126
 
127
Names that are not thus known and used in RTL-generation have no
128
effect; they are equivalent to no name at all.
129
 
130
For the purpose of debugging the compiler, you may also specify a
131
name beginning with the @samp{*} character.  Such a name is used only
132
for identifying the instruction in RTL dumps; it is entirely equivalent
133
to having a nameless pattern for all other purposes.
134
 
135
@item
136
The @dfn{RTL template} (@pxref{RTL Template}) is a vector of incomplete
137
RTL expressions which show what the instruction should look like.  It is
138
incomplete because it may contain @code{match_operand},
139
@code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup} expressions that stand for
140
operands of the instruction.
141
 
142
If the vector has only one element, that element is the template for the
143
instruction pattern.  If the vector has multiple elements, then the
144
instruction pattern is a @code{parallel} expression containing the
145
elements described.
146
 
147
@item
148
@cindex pattern conditions
149
@cindex conditions, in patterns
150
A condition.  This is a string which contains a C expression that is
151
the final test to decide whether an insn body matches this pattern.
152
 
153
@cindex named patterns and conditions
154
For a named pattern, the condition (if present) may not depend on
155
the data in the insn being matched, but only the target-machine-type
156
flags.  The compiler needs to test these conditions during
157
initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions are
158
available in a particular run.
159
 
160
@findex operands
161
For nameless patterns, the condition is applied only when matching an
162
individual insn, and only after the insn has matched the pattern's
163
recognition template.  The insn's operands may be found in the vector
164
@code{operands}.  For an insn where the condition has once matched, it
165
can't be used to control register allocation, for example by excluding
166
certain hard registers or hard register combinations.
167
 
168
@item
169
The @dfn{output template}: a string that says how to output matching
170
insns as assembler code.  @samp{%} in this string specifies where
171
to substitute the value of an operand.  @xref{Output Template}.
172
 
173
When simple substitution isn't general enough, you can specify a piece
174
of C code to compute the output.  @xref{Output Statement}.
175
 
176
@item
177
Optionally, a vector containing the values of attributes for insns matching
178
this pattern.  @xref{Insn Attributes}.
179
@end enumerate
180
 
181
@node Example
182
@section Example of @code{define_insn}
183
@cindex @code{define_insn} example
184
 
185
Here is an actual example of an instruction pattern, for the 68000/68020.
186
 
187
@smallexample
188
(define_insn "tstsi"
189
  [(set (cc0)
190
        (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))]
191
  ""
192
  "*
193
@{
194
  if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0]))
195
    return \"tstl %0\";
196
  return \"cmpl #0,%0\";
197
@}")
198
@end smallexample
199
 
200
@noindent
201
This can also be written using braced strings:
202
 
203
@smallexample
204
(define_insn "tstsi"
205
  [(set (cc0)
206
        (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))]
207
  ""
208
@{
209
  if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0]))
210
    return "tstl %0";
211
  return "cmpl #0,%0";
212
@})
213
@end smallexample
214
 
215
This is an instruction that sets the condition codes based on the value of
216
a general operand.  It has no condition, so any insn whose RTL description
217
has the form shown may be handled according to this pattern.  The name
218
@samp{tstsi} means ``test a @code{SImode} value'' and tells the RTL generation
219
pass that, when it is necessary to test such a value, an insn to do so
220
can be constructed using this pattern.
221
 
222
The output control string is a piece of C code which chooses which
223
output template to return based on the kind of operand and the specific
224
type of CPU for which code is being generated.
225
 
226
@samp{"rm"} is an operand constraint.  Its meaning is explained below.
227
 
228
@node RTL Template
229
@section RTL Template
230
@cindex RTL insn template
231
@cindex generating insns
232
@cindex insns, generating
233
@cindex recognizing insns
234
@cindex insns, recognizing
235
 
236
The RTL template is used to define which insns match the particular pattern
237
and how to find their operands.  For named patterns, the RTL template also
238
says how to construct an insn from specified operands.
239
 
240
Construction involves substituting specified operands into a copy of the
241
template.  Matching involves determining the values that serve as the
242
operands in the insn being matched.  Both of these activities are
243
controlled by special expression types that direct matching and
244
substitution of the operands.
245
 
246
@table @code
247
@findex match_operand
248
@item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} @var{constraint})
249
This expression is a placeholder for operand number @var{n} of
250
the insn.  When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n}
251
will be substituted at this point.  When matching an insn, whatever
252
appears at this position in the insn will be taken as operand
253
number @var{n}; but it must satisfy @var{predicate} or this instruction
254
pattern will not match at all.
255
 
256
Operand numbers must be chosen consecutively counting from zero in
257
each instruction pattern.  There may be only one @code{match_operand}
258
expression in the pattern for each operand number.  Usually operands
259
are numbered in the order of appearance in @code{match_operand}
260
expressions.  In the case of a @code{define_expand}, any operand numbers
261
used only in @code{match_dup} expressions have higher values than all
262
other operand numbers.
263
 
264
@var{predicate} is a string that is the name of a function that
265
accepts two arguments, an expression and a machine mode.
266
@xref{Predicates}.  During matching, the function will be called with
267
the putative operand as the expression and @var{m} as the mode
268
argument (if @var{m} is not specified, @code{VOIDmode} will be used,
269
which normally causes @var{predicate} to accept any mode).  If it
270
returns zero, this instruction pattern fails to match.
271
@var{predicate} may be an empty string; then it means no test is to be
272
done on the operand, so anything which occurs in this position is
273
valid.
274
 
275
Most of the time, @var{predicate} will reject modes other than @var{m}---but
276
not always.  For example, the predicate @code{address_operand} uses
277
@var{m} as the mode of memory ref that the address should be valid for.
278
Many predicates accept @code{const_int} nodes even though their mode is
279
@code{VOIDmode}.
280
 
281
@var{constraint} controls reloading and the choice of the best register
282
class to use for a value, as explained later (@pxref{Constraints}).
283
If the constraint would be an empty string, it can be omitted.
284
 
285
People are often unclear on the difference between the constraint and the
286
predicate.  The predicate helps decide whether a given insn matches the
287
pattern.  The constraint plays no role in this decision; instead, it
288
controls various decisions in the case of an insn which does match.
289
 
290
@findex match_scratch
291
@item (match_scratch:@var{m} @var{n} @var{constraint})
292
This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n}
293
and indicates that operand must be a @code{scratch} or @code{reg}
294
expression.
295
 
296
When matching patterns, this is equivalent to
297
 
298
@smallexample
299
(match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} "scratch_operand" @var{pred})
300
@end smallexample
301
 
302
but, when generating RTL, it produces a (@code{scratch}:@var{m})
303
expression.
304
 
305
If the last few expressions in a @code{parallel} are @code{clobber}
306
expressions whose operands are either a hard register or
307
@code{match_scratch}, the combiner can add or delete them when
308
necessary.  @xref{Side Effects}.
309
 
310
@findex match_dup
311
@item (match_dup @var{n})
312
This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n}.
313
It is used when the operand needs to appear more than once in the
314
insn.
315
 
316
In construction, @code{match_dup} acts just like @code{match_operand}:
317
the operand is substituted into the insn being constructed.  But in
318
matching, @code{match_dup} behaves differently.  It assumes that operand
319
number @var{n} has already been determined by a @code{match_operand}
320
appearing earlier in the recognition template, and it matches only an
321
identical-looking expression.
322
 
323
Note that @code{match_dup} should not be used to tell the compiler that
324
a particular register is being used for two operands (example:
325
@code{add} that adds one register to another; the second register is
326
both an input operand and the output operand).  Use a matching
327
constraint (@pxref{Simple Constraints}) for those.  @code{match_dup} is for the cases where one
328
operand is used in two places in the template, such as an instruction
329
that computes both a quotient and a remainder, where the opcode takes
330
two input operands but the RTL template has to refer to each of those
331
twice; once for the quotient pattern and once for the remainder pattern.
332
 
333
@findex match_operator
334
@item (match_operator:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{operands}@dots{}])
335
This pattern is a kind of placeholder for a variable RTL expression
336
code.
337
 
338
When constructing an insn, it stands for an RTL expression whose
339
expression code is taken from that of operand @var{n}, and whose
340
operands are constructed from the patterns @var{operands}.
341
 
342
When matching an expression, it matches an expression if the function
343
@var{predicate} returns nonzero on that expression @emph{and} the
344
patterns @var{operands} match the operands of the expression.
345
 
346
Suppose that the function @code{commutative_operator} is defined as
347
follows, to match any expression whose operator is one of the
348
commutative arithmetic operators of RTL and whose mode is @var{mode}:
349
 
350
@smallexample
351
int
352
commutative_integer_operator (x, mode)
353
     rtx x;
354
     enum machine_mode mode;
355
@{
356
  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
357
  if (GET_MODE (x) != mode)
358
    return 0;
359
  return (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
360
          || code == EQ || code == NE);
361
@}
362
@end smallexample
363
 
364
Then the following pattern will match any RTL expression consisting
365
of a commutative operator applied to two general operands:
366
 
367
@smallexample
368
(match_operator:SI 3 "commutative_operator"
369
  [(match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "g")
370
   (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g")])
371
@end smallexample
372
 
373
Here the vector @code{[@var{operands}@dots{}]} contains two patterns
374
because the expressions to be matched all contain two operands.
375
 
376
When this pattern does match, the two operands of the commutative
377
operator are recorded as operands 1 and 2 of the insn.  (This is done
378
by the two instances of @code{match_operand}.)  Operand 3 of the insn
379
will be the entire commutative expression: use @code{GET_CODE
380
(operands[3])} to see which commutative operator was used.
381
 
382
The machine mode @var{m} of @code{match_operator} works like that of
383
@code{match_operand}: it is passed as the second argument to the
384
predicate function, and that function is solely responsible for
385
deciding whether the expression to be matched ``has'' that mode.
386
 
387
When constructing an insn, argument 3 of the gen-function will specify
388
the operation (i.e.@: the expression code) for the expression to be
389
made.  It should be an RTL expression, whose expression code is copied
390
into a new expression whose operands are arguments 1 and 2 of the
391
gen-function.  The subexpressions of argument 3 are not used;
392
only its expression code matters.
393
 
394
When @code{match_operator} is used in a pattern for matching an insn,
395
it usually best if the operand number of the @code{match_operator}
396
is higher than that of the actual operands of the insn.  This improves
397
register allocation because the register allocator often looks at
398
operands 1 and 2 of insns to see if it can do register tying.
399
 
400
There is no way to specify constraints in @code{match_operator}.  The
401
operand of the insn which corresponds to the @code{match_operator}
402
never has any constraints because it is never reloaded as a whole.
403
However, if parts of its @var{operands} are matched by
404
@code{match_operand} patterns, those parts may have constraints of
405
their own.
406
 
407
@findex match_op_dup
408
@item (match_op_dup:@var{m} @var{n}[@var{operands}@dots{}])
409
Like @code{match_dup}, except that it applies to operators instead of
410
operands.  When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be
411
substituted at this point.  But in matching, @code{match_op_dup} behaves
412
differently.  It assumes that operand number @var{n} has already been
413
determined by a @code{match_operator} appearing earlier in the
414
recognition template, and it matches only an identical-looking
415
expression.
416
 
417
@findex match_parallel
418
@item (match_parallel @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{subpat}@dots{}])
419
This pattern is a placeholder for an insn that consists of a
420
@code{parallel} expression with a variable number of elements.  This
421
expression should only appear at the top level of an insn pattern.
422
 
423
When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be substituted at
424
this point.  When matching an insn, it matches if the body of the insn
425
is a @code{parallel} expression with at least as many elements as the
426
vector of @var{subpat} expressions in the @code{match_parallel}, if each
427
@var{subpat} matches the corresponding element of the @code{parallel},
428
@emph{and} the function @var{predicate} returns nonzero on the
429
@code{parallel} that is the body of the insn.  It is the responsibility
430
of the predicate to validate elements of the @code{parallel} beyond
431
those listed in the @code{match_parallel}.
432
 
433
A typical use of @code{match_parallel} is to match load and store
434
multiple expressions, which can contain a variable number of elements
435
in a @code{parallel}.  For example,
436
 
437
@smallexample
438
(define_insn ""
439
  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
440
     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
441
           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
442
      (use (reg:SI 179))
443
      (clobber (reg:SI 179))])]
444
  ""
445
  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
446
@end smallexample
447
 
448
This example comes from @file{a29k.md}.  The function
449
@code{load_multiple_operation} is defined in @file{a29k.c} and checks
450
that subsequent elements in the @code{parallel} are the same as the
451
@code{set} in the pattern, except that they are referencing subsequent
452
registers and memory locations.
453
 
454
An insn that matches this pattern might look like:
455
 
456
@smallexample
457
(parallel
458
 [(set (reg:SI 20) (mem:SI (reg:SI 100)))
459
  (use (reg:SI 179))
460
  (clobber (reg:SI 179))
461
  (set (reg:SI 21)
462
       (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100)
463
                        (const_int 4))))
464
  (set (reg:SI 22)
465
       (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100)
466
                        (const_int 8))))])
467
@end smallexample
468
 
469
@findex match_par_dup
470
@item (match_par_dup @var{n} [@var{subpat}@dots{}])
471
Like @code{match_op_dup}, but for @code{match_parallel} instead of
472
@code{match_operator}.
473
 
474
@end table
475
 
476
@node Output Template
477
@section Output Templates and Operand Substitution
478
@cindex output templates
479
@cindex operand substitution
480
 
481
@cindex @samp{%} in template
482
@cindex percent sign
483
The @dfn{output template} is a string which specifies how to output the
484
assembler code for an instruction pattern.  Most of the template is a
485
fixed string which is output literally.  The character @samp{%} is used
486
to specify where to substitute an operand; it can also be used to
487
identify places where different variants of the assembler require
488
different syntax.
489
 
490
In the simplest case, a @samp{%} followed by a digit @var{n} says to output
491
operand @var{n} at that point in the string.
492
 
493
@samp{%} followed by a letter and a digit says to output an operand in an
494
alternate fashion.  Four letters have standard, built-in meanings described
495
below.  The machine description macro @code{PRINT_OPERAND} can define
496
additional letters with nonstandard meanings.
497
 
498
@samp{%c@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand that is a
499
constant value without the syntax that normally indicates an immediate
500
operand.
501
 
502
@samp{%n@var{digit}} is like @samp{%c@var{digit}} except that the value of
503
the constant is negated before printing.
504
 
505
@samp{%a@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand as if it were a
506
memory reference, with the actual operand treated as the address.  This may
507
be useful when outputting a ``load address'' instruction, because often the
508
assembler syntax for such an instruction requires you to write the operand
509
as if it were a memory reference.
510
 
511
@samp{%l@var{digit}} is used to substitute a @code{label_ref} into a jump
512
instruction.
513
 
514
@samp{%=} outputs a number which is unique to each instruction in the
515
entire compilation.  This is useful for making local labels to be
516
referred to more than once in a single template that generates multiple
517
assembler instructions.
518
 
519
@samp{%} followed by a punctuation character specifies a substitution that
520
does not use an operand.  Only one case is standard: @samp{%%} outputs a
521
@samp{%} into the assembler code.  Other nonstandard cases can be
522
defined in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro.  You must also define
523
which punctuation characters are valid with the
524
@code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} macro.
525
 
526
@cindex \
527
@cindex backslash
528
The template may generate multiple assembler instructions.  Write the text
529
for the instructions, with @samp{\;} between them.
530
 
531
@cindex matching operands
532
When the RTL contains two operands which are required by constraint to match
533
each other, the output template must refer only to the lower-numbered operand.
534
Matching operands are not always identical, and the rest of the compiler
535
arranges to put the proper RTL expression for printing into the lower-numbered
536
operand.
537
 
538
One use of nonstandard letters or punctuation following @samp{%} is to
539
distinguish between different assembler languages for the same machine; for
540
example, Motorola syntax versus MIT syntax for the 68000.  Motorola syntax
541
requires periods in most opcode names, while MIT syntax does not.  For
542
example, the opcode @samp{movel} in MIT syntax is @samp{move.l} in Motorola
543
syntax.  The same file of patterns is used for both kinds of output syntax,
544
but the character sequence @samp{%.} is used in each place where Motorola
545
syntax wants a period.  The @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro for Motorola syntax
546
defines the sequence to output a period; the macro for MIT syntax defines
547
it to do nothing.
548
 
549
@cindex @code{#} in template
550
As a special case, a template consisting of the single character @code{#}
551
instructs the compiler to first split the insn, and then output the
552
resulting instructions separately.  This helps eliminate redundancy in the
553
output templates.   If you have a @code{define_insn} that needs to emit
554
multiple assembler instructions, and there is an matching @code{define_split}
555
already defined, then you can simply use @code{#} as the output template
556
instead of writing an output template that emits the multiple assembler
557
instructions.
558
 
559
If the macro @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is defined, you can use construct
560
of the form @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@}} in the templates.  These
561
describe multiple variants of assembler language syntax.
562
@xref{Instruction Output}.
563
 
564
@node Output Statement
565
@section C Statements for Assembler Output
566
@cindex output statements
567
@cindex C statements for assembler output
568
@cindex generating assembler output
569
 
570
Often a single fixed template string cannot produce correct and efficient
571
assembler code for all the cases that are recognized by a single
572
instruction pattern.  For example, the opcodes may depend on the kinds of
573
operands; or some unfortunate combinations of operands may require extra
574
machine instructions.
575
 
576
If the output control string starts with a @samp{@@}, then it is actually
577
a series of templates, each on a separate line.  (Blank lines and
578
leading spaces and tabs are ignored.)  The templates correspond to the
579
pattern's constraint alternatives (@pxref{Multi-Alternative}).  For example,
580
if a target machine has a two-address add instruction @samp{addr} to add
581
into a register and another @samp{addm} to add a register to memory, you
582
might write this pattern:
583
 
584
@smallexample
585
(define_insn "addsi3"
586
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
587
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0,0")
588
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g,r")))]
589
  ""
590
  "@@
591
   addr %2,%0
592
   addm %2,%0")
593
@end smallexample
594
 
595
@cindex @code{*} in template
596
@cindex asterisk in template
597
If the output control string starts with a @samp{*}, then it is not an
598
output template but rather a piece of C program that should compute a
599
template.  It should execute a @code{return} statement to return the
600
template-string you want.  Most such templates use C string literals, which
601
require doublequote characters to delimit them.  To include these
602
doublequote characters in the string, prefix each one with @samp{\}.
603
 
604
If the output control string is written as a brace block instead of a
605
double-quoted string, it is automatically assumed to be C code.  In that
606
case, it is not necessary to put in a leading asterisk, or to escape the
607
doublequotes surrounding C string literals.
608
 
609
The operands may be found in the array @code{operands}, whose C data type
610
is @code{rtx []}.
611
 
612
It is very common to select different ways of generating assembler code
613
based on whether an immediate operand is within a certain range.  Be
614
careful when doing this, because the result of @code{INTVAL} is an
615
integer on the host machine.  If the host machine has more bits in an
616
@code{int} than the target machine has in the mode in which the constant
617
will be used, then some of the bits you get from @code{INTVAL} will be
618
superfluous.  For proper results, you must carefully disregard the
619
values of those bits.
620
 
621
@findex output_asm_insn
622
It is possible to output an assembler instruction and then go on to output
623
or compute more of them, using the subroutine @code{output_asm_insn}.  This
624
receives two arguments: a template-string and a vector of operands.  The
625
vector may be @code{operands}, or it may be another array of @code{rtx}
626
that you declare locally and initialize yourself.
627
 
628
@findex which_alternative
629
When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often
630
the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which alternative
631
was matched.  When this is so, the C code can test the variable
632
@code{which_alternative}, which is the ordinal number of the alternative
633
that was actually satisfied (0 for the first, 1 for the second alternative,
634
etc.).
635
 
636
For example, suppose there are two opcodes for storing zero, @samp{clrreg}
637
for registers and @samp{clrmem} for memory locations.  Here is how
638
a pattern could use @code{which_alternative} to choose between them:
639
 
640
@smallexample
641
(define_insn ""
642
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
643
        (const_int 0))]
644
  ""
645
  @{
646
  return (which_alternative == 0
647
          ? "clrreg %0" : "clrmem %0");
648
  @})
649
@end smallexample
650
 
651
The example above, where the assembler code to generate was
652
@emph{solely} determined by the alternative, could also have been specified
653
as follows, having the output control string start with a @samp{@@}:
654
 
655
@smallexample
656
@group
657
(define_insn ""
658
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
659
        (const_int 0))]
660
  ""
661
  "@@
662
   clrreg %0
663
   clrmem %0")
664
@end group
665
@end smallexample
666
 
667
@node Predicates
668
@section Predicates
669
@cindex predicates
670
@cindex operand predicates
671
@cindex operator predicates
672
 
673
A predicate determines whether a @code{match_operand} or
674
@code{match_operator} expression matches, and therefore whether the
675
surrounding instruction pattern will be used for that combination of
676
operands.  GCC has a number of machine-independent predicates, and you
677
can define machine-specific predicates as needed.  By convention,
678
predicates used with @code{match_operand} have names that end in
679
@samp{_operand}, and those used with @code{match_operator} have names
680
that end in @samp{_operator}.
681
 
682
All predicates are Boolean functions (in the mathematical sense) of
683
two arguments: the RTL expression that is being considered at that
684
position in the instruction pattern, and the machine mode that the
685
@code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} specifies.  In this
686
section, the first argument is called @var{op} and the second argument
687
@var{mode}.  Predicates can be called from C as ordinary two-argument
688
functions; this can be useful in output templates or other
689
machine-specific code.
690
 
691
Operand predicates can allow operands that are not actually acceptable
692
to the hardware, as long as the constraints give reload the ability to
693
fix them up (@pxref{Constraints}).  However, GCC will usually generate
694
better code if the predicates specify the requirements of the machine
695
instructions as closely as possible.  Reload cannot fix up operands
696
that must be constants (``immediate operands''); you must use a
697
predicate that allows only constants, or else enforce the requirement
698
in the extra condition.
699
 
700
@cindex predicates and machine modes
701
@cindex normal predicates
702
@cindex special predicates
703
Most predicates handle their @var{mode} argument in a uniform manner.
704
If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode} (unspecified), then @var{op} can have
705
any mode.  If @var{mode} is anything else, then @var{op} must have the
706
same mode, unless @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or integer
707
@code{CONST_DOUBLE}.  These RTL expressions always have
708
@code{VOIDmode}, so it would be counterproductive to check that their
709
mode matches.  Instead, predicates that accept @code{CONST_INT} and/or
710
integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE} check that the value stored in the
711
constant will fit in the requested mode.
712
 
713
Predicates with this behavior are called @dfn{normal}.
714
@command{genrecog} can optimize the instruction recognizer based on
715
knowledge of how normal predicates treat modes.  It can also diagnose
716
certain kinds of common errors in the use of normal predicates; for
717
instance, it is almost always an error to use a normal predicate
718
without specifying a mode.
719
 
720
Predicates that do something different with their @var{mode} argument
721
are called @dfn{special}.  The generic predicates
722
@code{address_operand} and @code{pmode_register_operand} are special
723
predicates.  @command{genrecog} does not do any optimizations or
724
diagnosis when special predicates are used.
725
 
726
@menu
727
* Machine-Independent Predicates::  Predicates available to all back ends.
728
* Defining Predicates::             How to write machine-specific predicate
729
                                    functions.
730
@end menu
731
 
732
@node Machine-Independent Predicates
733
@subsection Machine-Independent Predicates
734
@cindex machine-independent predicates
735
@cindex generic predicates
736
 
737
These are the generic predicates available to all back ends.  They are
738
defined in @file{recog.c}.  The first category of predicates allow
739
only constant, or @dfn{immediate}, operands.
740
 
741
@defun immediate_operand
742
This predicate allows any sort of constant that fits in @var{mode}.
743
It is an appropriate choice for instructions that take operands that
744
must be constant.
745
@end defun
746
 
747
@defun const_int_operand
748
This predicate allows any @code{CONST_INT} expression that fits in
749
@var{mode}.  It is an appropriate choice for an immediate operand that
750
does not allow a symbol or label.
751
@end defun
752
 
753
@defun const_double_operand
754
This predicate accepts any @code{CONST_DOUBLE} expression that has
755
exactly @var{mode}.  If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, it will also
756
accept @code{CONST_INT}.  It is intended for immediate floating point
757
constants.
758
@end defun
759
 
760
@noindent
761
The second category of predicates allow only some kind of machine
762
register.
763
 
764
@defun register_operand
765
This predicate allows any @code{REG} or @code{SUBREG} expression that
766
is valid for @var{mode}.  It is often suitable for arithmetic
767
instruction operands on a RISC machine.
768
@end defun
769
 
770
@defun pmode_register_operand
771
This is a slight variant on @code{register_operand} which works around
772
a limitation in the machine-description reader.
773
 
774
@smallexample
775
(match_operand @var{n} "pmode_register_operand" @var{constraint})
776
@end smallexample
777
 
778
@noindent
779
means exactly what
780
 
781
@smallexample
782
(match_operand:P @var{n} "register_operand" @var{constraint})
783
@end smallexample
784
 
785
@noindent
786
would mean, if the machine-description reader accepted @samp{:P}
787
mode suffixes.  Unfortunately, it cannot, because @code{Pmode} is an
788
alias for some other mode, and might vary with machine-specific
789
options.  @xref{Misc}.
790
@end defun
791
 
792
@defun scratch_operand
793
This predicate allows hard registers and @code{SCRATCH} expressions,
794
but not pseudo-registers.  It is used internally by @code{match_scratch};
795
it should not be used directly.
796
@end defun
797
 
798
@noindent
799
The third category of predicates allow only some kind of memory reference.
800
 
801
@defun memory_operand
802
This predicate allows any valid reference to a quantity of mode
803
@var{mode} in memory, as determined by the weak form of
804
@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} (@pxref{Addressing Modes}).
805
@end defun
806
 
807
@defun address_operand
808
This predicate is a little unusual; it allows any operand that is a
809
valid expression for the @emph{address} of a quantity of mode
810
@var{mode}, again determined by the weak form of
811
@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.  To first order, if
812
@samp{@w{(mem:@var{mode} (@var{exp}))}} is acceptable to
813
@code{memory_operand}, then @var{exp} is acceptable to
814
@code{address_operand}.  Note that @var{exp} does not necessarily have
815
the mode @var{mode}.
816
@end defun
817
 
818
@defun indirect_operand
819
This is a stricter form of @code{memory_operand} which allows only
820
memory references with a @code{general_operand} as the address
821
expression.  New uses of this predicate are discouraged, because
822
@code{general_operand} is very permissive, so it's hard to tell what
823
an @code{indirect_operand} does or does not allow.  If a target has
824
different requirements for memory operands for different instructions,
825
it is better to define target-specific predicates which enforce the
826
hardware's requirements explicitly.
827
@end defun
828
 
829
@defun push_operand
830
This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for pushing a value
831
onto the stack.  This will be a @code{MEM} which refers to
832
@code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address expression
833
(@pxref{Incdec}); which one is determined by the
834
@code{STACK_PUSH_CODE} macro (@pxref{Frame Layout}).
835
@end defun
836
 
837
@defun pop_operand
838
This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for popping a value
839
off the stack.  Again, this will be a @code{MEM} referring to
840
@code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address
841
expression.  However, this time @code{STACK_POP_CODE} is expected.
842
@end defun
843
 
844
@noindent
845
The fourth category of predicates allow some combination of the above
846
operands.
847
 
848
@defun nonmemory_operand
849
This predicate allows any immediate or register operand valid for @var{mode}.
850
@end defun
851
 
852
@defun nonimmediate_operand
853
This predicate allows any register or memory operand valid for @var{mode}.
854
@end defun
855
 
856
@defun general_operand
857
This predicate allows any immediate, register, or memory operand
858
valid for @var{mode}.
859
@end defun
860
 
861
@noindent
862
Finally, there is one generic operator predicate.
863
 
864
@defun comparison_operator
865
This predicate matches any expression which performs an arithmetic
866
comparison in @var{mode}; that is, @code{COMPARISON_P} is true for the
867
expression code.
868
@end defun
869
 
870
@node Defining Predicates
871
@subsection Defining Machine-Specific Predicates
872
@cindex defining predicates
873
@findex define_predicate
874
@findex define_special_predicate
875
 
876
Many machines have requirements for their operands that cannot be
877
expressed precisely using the generic predicates.  You can define
878
additional predicates using @code{define_predicate} and
879
@code{define_special_predicate} expressions.  These expressions have
880
three operands:
881
 
882
@itemize @bullet
883
@item
884
The name of the predicate, as it will be referred to in
885
@code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} expressions.
886
 
887
@item
888
An RTL expression which evaluates to true if the predicate allows the
889
operand @var{op}, false if it does not.  This expression can only use
890
the following RTL codes:
891
 
892
@table @code
893
@item MATCH_OPERAND
894
When written inside a predicate expression, a @code{MATCH_OPERAND}
895
expression evaluates to true if the predicate it names would allow
896
@var{op}.  The operand number and constraint are ignored.  Due to
897
limitations in @command{genrecog}, you can only refer to generic
898
predicates and predicates that have already been defined.
899
 
900
@item MATCH_CODE
901
This expression evaluates to true if @var{op} or a specified
902
subexpression of @var{op} has one of a given list of RTX codes.
903
 
904
The first operand of this expression is a string constant containing a
905
comma-separated list of RTX code names (in lower case).  These are the
906
codes for which the @code{MATCH_CODE} will be true.
907
 
908
The second operand is a string constant which indicates what
909
subexpression of @var{op} to examine.  If it is absent or the empty
910
string, @var{op} itself is examined.  Otherwise, the string constant
911
must be a sequence of digits and/or lowercase letters.  Each character
912
indicates a subexpression to extract from the current expression; for
913
the first character this is @var{op}, for the second and subsequent
914
characters it is the result of the previous character.  A digit
915
@var{n} extracts @samp{@w{XEXP (@var{e}, @var{n})}}; a letter @var{l}
916
extracts @samp{@w{XVECEXP (@var{e}, 0, @var{n})}} where @var{n} is the
917
alphabetic ordinal of @var{l} (0 for `a', 1 for 'b', and so on).  The
918
@code{MATCH_CODE} then examines the RTX code of the subexpression
919
extracted by the complete string.  It is not possible to extract
920
components of an @code{rtvec} that is not at position 0 within its RTX
921
object.
922
 
923
@item MATCH_TEST
924
This expression has one operand, a string constant containing a C
925
expression.  The predicate's arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are
926
available with those names in the C expression.  The @code{MATCH_TEST}
927
evaluates to true if the C expression evaluates to a nonzero value.
928
@code{MATCH_TEST} expressions must not have side effects.
929
 
930
@item  AND
931
@itemx IOR
932
@itemx NOT
933
@itemx IF_THEN_ELSE
934
The basic @samp{MATCH_} expressions can be combined using these
935
logical operators, which have the semantics of the C operators
936
@samp{&&}, @samp{||}, @samp{!}, and @samp{@w{? :}} respectively.  As
937
in Common Lisp, you may give an @code{AND} or @code{IOR} expression an
938
arbitrary number of arguments; this has exactly the same effect as
939
writing a chain of two-argument @code{AND} or @code{IOR} expressions.
940
@end table
941
 
942
@item
943
An optional block of C code, which should execute
944
@samp{@w{return true}} if the predicate is found to match and
945
@samp{@w{return false}} if it does not.  It must not have any side
946
effects.  The predicate arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are
947
available with those names.
948
 
949
If a code block is present in a predicate definition, then the RTL
950
expression must evaluate to true @emph{and} the code block must
951
execute @samp{@w{return true}} for the predicate to allow the operand.
952
The RTL expression is evaluated first; do not re-check anything in the
953
code block that was checked in the RTL expression.
954
@end itemize
955
 
956
The program @command{genrecog} scans @code{define_predicate} and
957
@code{define_special_predicate} expressions to determine which RTX
958
codes are possibly allowed.  You should always make this explicit in
959
the RTL predicate expression, using @code{MATCH_OPERAND} and
960
@code{MATCH_CODE}.
961
 
962
Here is an example of a simple predicate definition, from the IA64
963
machine description:
964
 
965
@smallexample
966
@group
967
;; @r{True if @var{op} is a @code{SYMBOL_REF} which refers to the sdata section.}
968
(define_predicate "small_addr_symbolic_operand"
969
  (and (match_code "symbol_ref")
970
       (match_test "SYMBOL_REF_SMALL_ADDR_P (op)")))
971
@end group
972
@end smallexample
973
 
974
@noindent
975
And here is another, showing the use of the C block.
976
 
977
@smallexample
978
@group
979
;; @r{True if @var{op} is a register operand that is (or could be) a GR reg.}
980
(define_predicate "gr_register_operand"
981
  (match_operand 0 "register_operand")
982
@{
983
  unsigned int regno;
984
  if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
985
    op = SUBREG_REG (op);
986
 
987
  regno = REGNO (op);
988
  return (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || GENERAL_REGNO_P (regno));
989
@})
990
@end group
991
@end smallexample
992
 
993
Predicates written with @code{define_predicate} automatically include
994
a test that @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, or @var{op} has the same
995
mode as @var{mode}, or @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or
996
@code{CONST_DOUBLE}.  They do @emph{not} check specifically for
997
integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE}, nor do they test that the value of either
998
kind of constant fits in the requested mode.  This is because
999
target-specific predicates that take constants usually have to do more
1000
stringent value checks anyway.  If you need the exact same treatment
1001
of @code{CONST_INT} or @code{CONST_DOUBLE} that the generic predicates
1002
provide, use a @code{MATCH_OPERAND} subexpression to call
1003
@code{const_int_operand}, @code{const_double_operand}, or
1004
@code{immediate_operand}.
1005
 
1006
Predicates written with @code{define_special_predicate} do not get any
1007
automatic mode checks, and are treated as having special mode handling
1008
by @command{genrecog}.
1009
 
1010
The program @command{genpreds} is responsible for generating code to
1011
test predicates.  It also writes a header file containing function
1012
declarations for all machine-specific predicates.  It is not necessary
1013
to declare these predicates in @file{@var{cpu}-protos.h}.
1014
@end ifset
1015
 
1016
@c Most of this node appears by itself (in a different place) even
1017
@c when the INTERNALS flag is clear.  Passages that require the internals
1018
@c manual's context are conditionalized to appear only in the internals manual.
1019
@ifset INTERNALS
1020
@node Constraints
1021
@section Operand Constraints
1022
@cindex operand constraints
1023
@cindex constraints
1024
 
1025
Each @code{match_operand} in an instruction pattern can specify
1026
constraints for the operands allowed.  The constraints allow you to
1027
fine-tune matching within the set of operands allowed by the
1028
predicate.
1029
 
1030
@end ifset
1031
@ifclear INTERNALS
1032
@node Constraints
1033
@section Constraints for @code{asm} Operands
1034
@cindex operand constraints, @code{asm}
1035
@cindex constraints, @code{asm}
1036
@cindex @code{asm} constraints
1037
 
1038
Here are specific details on what constraint letters you can use with
1039
@code{asm} operands.
1040
@end ifclear
1041
Constraints can say whether
1042
an operand may be in a register, and which kinds of register; whether the
1043
operand can be a memory reference, and which kinds of address; whether the
1044
operand may be an immediate constant, and which possible values it may
1045
have.  Constraints can also require two operands to match.
1046
 
1047
@ifset INTERNALS
1048
@menu
1049
* Simple Constraints::  Basic use of constraints.
1050
* Multi-Alternative::   When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns.
1051
* Class Preferences::   Constraints guide which hard register to put things in.
1052
* Modifiers::           More precise control over effects of constraints.
1053
* Machine Constraints:: Existing constraints for some particular machines.
1054
* Define Constraints::  How to define machine-specific constraints.
1055
* C Constraint Interface:: How to test constraints from C code.
1056
@end menu
1057
@end ifset
1058
 
1059
@ifclear INTERNALS
1060
@menu
1061
* Simple Constraints::  Basic use of constraints.
1062
* Multi-Alternative::   When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns.
1063
* Modifiers::           More precise control over effects of constraints.
1064
* Machine Constraints:: Special constraints for some particular machines.
1065
@end menu
1066
@end ifclear
1067
 
1068
@node Simple Constraints
1069
@subsection Simple Constraints
1070
@cindex simple constraints
1071
 
1072
The simplest kind of constraint is a string full of letters, each of
1073
which describes one kind of operand that is permitted.  Here are
1074
the letters that are allowed:
1075
 
1076
@table @asis
1077
@item whitespace
1078
Whitespace characters are ignored and can be inserted at any position
1079
except the first.  This enables each alternative for different operands to
1080
be visually aligned in the machine description even if they have different
1081
number of constraints and modifiers.
1082
 
1083
@cindex @samp{m} in constraint
1084
@cindex memory references in constraints
1085
@item @samp{m}
1086
A memory operand is allowed, with any kind of address that the machine
1087
supports in general.
1088
 
1089
@cindex offsettable address
1090
@cindex @samp{o} in constraint
1091
@item @samp{o}
1092
A memory operand is allowed, but only if the address is
1093
@dfn{offsettable}.  This means that adding a small integer (actually,
1094
the width in bytes of the operand, as determined by its machine mode)
1095
may be added to the address and the result is also a valid memory
1096
address.
1097
 
1098
@cindex autoincrement/decrement addressing
1099
For example, an address which is constant is offsettable; so is an
1100
address that is the sum of a register and a constant (as long as a
1101
slightly larger constant is also within the range of address-offsets
1102
supported by the machine); but an autoincrement or autodecrement
1103
address is not offsettable.  More complicated indirect/indexed
1104
addresses may or may not be offsettable depending on the other
1105
addressing modes that the machine supports.
1106
 
1107
Note that in an output operand which can be matched by another
1108
operand, the constraint letter @samp{o} is valid only when accompanied
1109
by both @samp{<} (if the target machine has predecrement addressing)
1110
and @samp{>} (if the target machine has preincrement addressing).
1111
 
1112
@cindex @samp{V} in constraint
1113
@item @samp{V}
1114
A memory operand that is not offsettable.  In other words, anything that
1115
would fit the @samp{m} constraint but not the @samp{o} constraint.
1116
 
1117
@cindex @samp{<} in constraint
1118
@item @samp{<}
1119
A memory operand with autodecrement addressing (either predecrement or
1120
postdecrement) is allowed.
1121
 
1122
@cindex @samp{>} in constraint
1123
@item @samp{>}
1124
A memory operand with autoincrement addressing (either preincrement or
1125
postincrement) is allowed.
1126
 
1127
@cindex @samp{r} in constraint
1128
@cindex registers in constraints
1129
@item @samp{r}
1130
A register operand is allowed provided that it is in a general
1131
register.
1132
 
1133
@cindex constants in constraints
1134
@cindex @samp{i} in constraint
1135
@item @samp{i}
1136
An immediate integer operand (one with constant value) is allowed.
1137
This includes symbolic constants whose values will be known only at
1138
assembly time or later.
1139
 
1140
@cindex @samp{n} in constraint
1141
@item @samp{n}
1142
An immediate integer operand with a known numeric value is allowed.
1143
Many systems cannot support assembly-time constants for operands less
1144
than a word wide.  Constraints for these operands should use @samp{n}
1145
rather than @samp{i}.
1146
 
1147
@cindex @samp{I} in constraint
1148
@item @samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}
1149
Other letters in the range @samp{I} through @samp{P} may be defined in
1150
a machine-dependent fashion to permit immediate integer operands with
1151
explicit integer values in specified ranges.  For example, on the
1152
68000, @samp{I} is defined to stand for the range of values 1 to 8.
1153
This is the range permitted as a shift count in the shift
1154
instructions.
1155
 
1156
@cindex @samp{E} in constraint
1157
@item @samp{E}
1158
An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double}) is
1159
allowed, but only if the target floating point format is the same as
1160
that of the host machine (on which the compiler is running).
1161
 
1162
@cindex @samp{F} in constraint
1163
@item @samp{F}
1164
An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double} or
1165
@code{const_vector}) is allowed.
1166
 
1167
@cindex @samp{G} in constraint
1168
@cindex @samp{H} in constraint
1169
@item @samp{G}, @samp{H}
1170
@samp{G} and @samp{H} may be defined in a machine-dependent fashion to
1171
permit immediate floating operands in particular ranges of values.
1172
 
1173
@cindex @samp{s} in constraint
1174
@item @samp{s}
1175
An immediate integer operand whose value is not an explicit integer is
1176
allowed.
1177
 
1178
This might appear strange; if an insn allows a constant operand with a
1179
value not known at compile time, it certainly must allow any known
1180
value.  So why use @samp{s} instead of @samp{i}?  Sometimes it allows
1181
better code to be generated.
1182
 
1183
For example, on the 68000 in a fullword instruction it is possible to
1184
use an immediate operand; but if the immediate value is between @minus{}128
1185
and 127, better code results from loading the value into a register and
1186
using the register.  This is because the load into the register can be
1187
done with a @samp{moveq} instruction.  We arrange for this to happen
1188
by defining the letter @samp{K} to mean ``any integer outside the
1189
range @minus{}128 to 127'', and then specifying @samp{Ks} in the operand
1190
constraints.
1191
 
1192
@cindex @samp{g} in constraint
1193
@item @samp{g}
1194
Any register, memory or immediate integer operand is allowed, except for
1195
registers that are not general registers.
1196
 
1197
@cindex @samp{X} in constraint
1198
@item @samp{X}
1199
@ifset INTERNALS
1200
Any operand whatsoever is allowed, even if it does not satisfy
1201
@code{general_operand}.  This is normally used in the constraint of
1202
a @code{match_scratch} when certain alternatives will not actually
1203
require a scratch register.
1204
@end ifset
1205
@ifclear INTERNALS
1206
Any operand whatsoever is allowed.
1207
@end ifclear
1208
 
1209
@cindex @samp{0} in constraint
1210
@cindex digits in constraint
1211
@item @samp{0}, @samp{1}, @samp{2}, @dots{} @samp{9}
1212
An operand that matches the specified operand number is allowed.  If a
1213
digit is used together with letters within the same alternative, the
1214
digit should come last.
1215
 
1216
This number is allowed to be more than a single digit.  If multiple
1217
digits are encountered consecutively, they are interpreted as a single
1218
decimal integer.  There is scant chance for ambiguity, since to-date
1219
it has never been desirable that @samp{10} be interpreted as matching
1220
either operand 1 @emph{or} operand 0.  Should this be desired, one
1221
can use multiple alternatives instead.
1222
 
1223
@cindex matching constraint
1224
@cindex constraint, matching
1225
This is called a @dfn{matching constraint} and what it really means is
1226
that the assembler has only a single operand that fills two roles
1227
@ifset INTERNALS
1228
considered separate in the RTL insn.  For example, an add insn has two
1229
input operands and one output operand in the RTL, but on most CISC
1230
@end ifset
1231
@ifclear INTERNALS
1232
which @code{asm} distinguishes.  For example, an add instruction uses
1233
two input operands and an output operand, but on most CISC
1234
@end ifclear
1235
machines an add instruction really has only two operands, one of them an
1236
input-output operand:
1237
 
1238
@smallexample
1239
addl #35,r12
1240
@end smallexample
1241
 
1242
Matching constraints are used in these circumstances.
1243
More precisely, the two operands that match must include one input-only
1244
operand and one output-only operand.  Moreover, the digit must be a
1245
smaller number than the number of the operand that uses it in the
1246
constraint.
1247
 
1248
@ifset INTERNALS
1249
For operands to match in a particular case usually means that they
1250
are identical-looking RTL expressions.  But in a few special cases
1251
specific kinds of dissimilarity are allowed.  For example, @code{*x}
1252
as an input operand will match @code{*x++} as an output operand.
1253
For proper results in such cases, the output template should always
1254
use the output-operand's number when printing the operand.
1255
@end ifset
1256
 
1257
@cindex load address instruction
1258
@cindex push address instruction
1259
@cindex address constraints
1260
@cindex @samp{p} in constraint
1261
@item @samp{p}
1262
An operand that is a valid memory address is allowed.  This is
1263
for ``load address'' and ``push address'' instructions.
1264
 
1265
@findex address_operand
1266
@samp{p} in the constraint must be accompanied by @code{address_operand}
1267
as the predicate in the @code{match_operand}.  This predicate interprets
1268
the mode specified in the @code{match_operand} as the mode of the memory
1269
reference for which the address would be valid.
1270
 
1271
@cindex other register constraints
1272
@cindex extensible constraints
1273
@item @var{other-letters}
1274
Other letters can be defined in machine-dependent fashion to stand for
1275
particular classes of registers or other arbitrary operand types.
1276
@samp{d}, @samp{a} and @samp{f} are defined on the 68000/68020 to stand
1277
for data, address and floating point registers.
1278
@end table
1279
 
1280
@ifset INTERNALS
1281
In order to have valid assembler code, each operand must satisfy
1282
its constraint.  But a failure to do so does not prevent the pattern
1283
from applying to an insn.  Instead, it directs the compiler to modify
1284
the code so that the constraint will be satisfied.  Usually this is
1285
done by copying an operand into a register.
1286
 
1287
Contrast, therefore, the two instruction patterns that follow:
1288
 
1289
@smallexample
1290
(define_insn ""
1291
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r")
1292
        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
1293
                 (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r")))]
1294
  ""
1295
  "@dots{}")
1296
@end smallexample
1297
 
1298
@noindent
1299
which has two operands, one of which must appear in two places, and
1300
 
1301
@smallexample
1302
(define_insn ""
1303
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r")
1304
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
1305
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "r")))]
1306
  ""
1307
  "@dots{}")
1308
@end smallexample
1309
 
1310
@noindent
1311
which has three operands, two of which are required by a constraint to be
1312
identical.  If we are considering an insn of the form
1313
 
1314
@smallexample
1315
(insn @var{n} @var{prev} @var{next}
1316
  (set (reg:SI 3)
1317
       (plus:SI (reg:SI 6) (reg:SI 109)))
1318
  @dots{})
1319
@end smallexample
1320
 
1321
@noindent
1322
the first pattern would not apply at all, because this insn does not
1323
contain two identical subexpressions in the right place.  The pattern would
1324
say, ``That does not look like an add instruction; try other patterns''.
1325
The second pattern would say, ``Yes, that's an add instruction, but there
1326
is something wrong with it''.  It would direct the reload pass of the
1327
compiler to generate additional insns to make the constraint true.  The
1328
results might look like this:
1329
 
1330
@smallexample
1331
(insn @var{n2} @var{prev} @var{n}
1332
  (set (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 6))
1333
  @dots{})
1334
 
1335
(insn @var{n} @var{n2} @var{next}
1336
  (set (reg:SI 3)
1337
       (plus:SI (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 109)))
1338
  @dots{})
1339
@end smallexample
1340
 
1341
It is up to you to make sure that each operand, in each pattern, has
1342
constraints that can handle any RTL expression that could be present for
1343
that operand.  (When multiple alternatives are in use, each pattern must,
1344
for each possible combination of operand expressions, have at least one
1345
alternative which can handle that combination of operands.)  The
1346
constraints don't need to @emph{allow} any possible operand---when this is
1347
the case, they do not constrain---but they must at least point the way to
1348
reloading any possible operand so that it will fit.
1349
 
1350
@itemize @bullet
1351
@item
1352
If the constraint accepts whatever operands the predicate permits,
1353
there is no problem: reloading is never necessary for this operand.
1354
 
1355
For example, an operand whose constraints permit everything except
1356
registers is safe provided its predicate rejects registers.
1357
 
1358
An operand whose predicate accepts only constant values is safe
1359
provided its constraints include the letter @samp{i}.  If any possible
1360
constant value is accepted, then nothing less than @samp{i} will do;
1361
if the predicate is more selective, then the constraints may also be
1362
more selective.
1363
 
1364
@item
1365
Any operand expression can be reloaded by copying it into a register.
1366
So if an operand's constraints allow some kind of register, it is
1367
certain to be safe.  It need not permit all classes of registers; the
1368
compiler knows how to copy a register into another register of the
1369
proper class in order to make an instruction valid.
1370
 
1371
@cindex nonoffsettable memory reference
1372
@cindex memory reference, nonoffsettable
1373
@item
1374
A nonoffsettable memory reference can be reloaded by copying the
1375
address into a register.  So if the constraint uses the letter
1376
@samp{o}, all memory references are taken care of.
1377
 
1378
@item
1379
A constant operand can be reloaded by allocating space in memory to
1380
hold it as preinitialized data.  Then the memory reference can be used
1381
in place of the constant.  So if the constraint uses the letters
1382
@samp{o} or @samp{m}, constant operands are not a problem.
1383
 
1384
@item
1385
If the constraint permits a constant and a pseudo register used in an insn
1386
was not allocated to a hard register and is equivalent to a constant,
1387
the register will be replaced with the constant.  If the predicate does
1388
not permit a constant and the insn is re-recognized for some reason, the
1389
compiler will crash.  Thus the predicate must always recognize any
1390
objects allowed by the constraint.
1391
@end itemize
1392
 
1393
If the operand's predicate can recognize registers, but the constraint does
1394
not permit them, it can make the compiler crash.  When this operand happens
1395
to be a register, the reload pass will be stymied, because it does not know
1396
how to copy a register temporarily into memory.
1397
 
1398
If the predicate accepts a unary operator, the constraint applies to the
1399
operand.  For example, the MIPS processor at ISA level 3 supports an
1400
instruction which adds two registers in @code{SImode} to produce a
1401
@code{DImode} result, but only if the registers are correctly sign
1402
extended.  This predicate for the input operands accepts a
1403
@code{sign_extend} of an @code{SImode} register.  Write the constraint
1404
to indicate the type of register that is required for the operand of the
1405
@code{sign_extend}.
1406
@end ifset
1407
 
1408
@node Multi-Alternative
1409
@subsection Multiple Alternative Constraints
1410
@cindex multiple alternative constraints
1411
 
1412
Sometimes a single instruction has multiple alternative sets of possible
1413
operands.  For example, on the 68000, a logical-or instruction can combine
1414
register or an immediate value into memory, or it can combine any kind of
1415
operand into a register; but it cannot combine one memory location into
1416
another.
1417
 
1418
These constraints are represented as multiple alternatives.  An alternative
1419
can be described by a series of letters for each operand.  The overall
1420
constraint for an operand is made from the letters for this operand
1421
from the first alternative, a comma, the letters for this operand from
1422
the second alternative, a comma, and so on until the last alternative.
1423
@ifset INTERNALS
1424
Here is how it is done for fullword logical-or on the 68000:
1425
 
1426
@smallexample
1427
(define_insn "iorsi3"
1428
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=m,d")
1429
        (ior:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0")
1430
                (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dKs,dmKs")))]
1431
  @dots{})
1432
@end smallexample
1433
 
1434
The first alternative has @samp{m} (memory) for operand 0, @samp{0} for
1435
operand 1 (meaning it must match operand 0), and @samp{dKs} for operand
1436
2.  The second alternative has @samp{d} (data register) for operand 0,
1437
@samp{0} for operand 1, and @samp{dmKs} for operand 2.  The @samp{=} and
1438
@samp{%} in the constraints apply to all the alternatives; their
1439
meaning is explained in the next section (@pxref{Class Preferences}).
1440
@end ifset
1441
 
1442
@c FIXME Is this ? and ! stuff of use in asm()?  If not, hide unless INTERNAL
1443
If all the operands fit any one alternative, the instruction is valid.
1444
Otherwise, for each alternative, the compiler counts how many instructions
1445
must be added to copy the operands so that that alternative applies.
1446
The alternative requiring the least copying is chosen.  If two alternatives
1447
need the same amount of copying, the one that comes first is chosen.
1448
These choices can be altered with the @samp{?} and @samp{!} characters:
1449
 
1450
@table @code
1451
@cindex @samp{?} in constraint
1452
@cindex question mark
1453
@item ?
1454
Disparage slightly the alternative that the @samp{?} appears in,
1455
as a choice when no alternative applies exactly.  The compiler regards
1456
this alternative as one unit more costly for each @samp{?} that appears
1457
in it.
1458
 
1459
@cindex @samp{!} in constraint
1460
@cindex exclamation point
1461
@item !
1462
Disparage severely the alternative that the @samp{!} appears in.
1463
This alternative can still be used if it fits without reloading,
1464
but if reloading is needed, some other alternative will be used.
1465
@end table
1466
 
1467
@ifset INTERNALS
1468
When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often
1469
the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which
1470
alternative was matched.  When this is so, the C code for writing the
1471
assembler code can use the variable @code{which_alternative}, which is
1472
the ordinal number of the alternative that was actually satisfied (0 for
1473
the first, 1 for the second alternative, etc.).  @xref{Output Statement}.
1474
@end ifset
1475
 
1476
@ifset INTERNALS
1477
@node Class Preferences
1478
@subsection Register Class Preferences
1479
@cindex class preference constraints
1480
@cindex register class preference constraints
1481
 
1482
@cindex voting between constraint alternatives
1483
The operand constraints have another function: they enable the compiler
1484
to decide which kind of hardware register a pseudo register is best
1485
allocated to.  The compiler examines the constraints that apply to the
1486
insns that use the pseudo register, looking for the machine-dependent
1487
letters such as @samp{d} and @samp{a} that specify classes of registers.
1488
The pseudo register is put in whichever class gets the most ``votes''.
1489
The constraint letters @samp{g} and @samp{r} also vote: they vote in
1490
favor of a general register.  The machine description says which registers
1491
are considered general.
1492
 
1493
Of course, on some machines all registers are equivalent, and no register
1494
classes are defined.  Then none of this complexity is relevant.
1495
@end ifset
1496
 
1497
@node Modifiers
1498
@subsection Constraint Modifier Characters
1499
@cindex modifiers in constraints
1500
@cindex constraint modifier characters
1501
 
1502
@c prevent bad page break with this line
1503
Here are constraint modifier characters.
1504
 
1505
@table @samp
1506
@cindex @samp{=} in constraint
1507
@item =
1508
Means that this operand is write-only for this instruction: the previous
1509
value is discarded and replaced by output data.
1510
 
1511
@cindex @samp{+} in constraint
1512
@item +
1513
Means that this operand is both read and written by the instruction.
1514
 
1515
When the compiler fixes up the operands to satisfy the constraints,
1516
it needs to know which operands are inputs to the instruction and
1517
which are outputs from it.  @samp{=} identifies an output; @samp{+}
1518
identifies an operand that is both input and output; all other operands
1519
are assumed to be input only.
1520
 
1521
If you specify @samp{=} or @samp{+} in a constraint, you put it in the
1522
first character of the constraint string.
1523
 
1524
@cindex @samp{&} in constraint
1525
@cindex earlyclobber operand
1526
@item &
1527
Means (in a particular alternative) that this operand is an
1528
@dfn{earlyclobber} operand, which is modified before the instruction is
1529
finished using the input operands.  Therefore, this operand may not lie
1530
in a register that is used as an input operand or as part of any memory
1531
address.
1532
 
1533
@samp{&} applies only to the alternative in which it is written.  In
1534
constraints with multiple alternatives, sometimes one alternative
1535
requires @samp{&} while others do not.  See, for example, the
1536
@samp{movdf} insn of the 68000.
1537
 
1538
An input operand can be tied to an earlyclobber operand if its only
1539
use as an input occurs before the early result is written.  Adding
1540
alternatives of this form often allows GCC to produce better code
1541
when only some of the inputs can be affected by the earlyclobber.
1542
See, for example, the @samp{mulsi3} insn of the ARM@.
1543
 
1544
@samp{&} does not obviate the need to write @samp{=}.
1545
 
1546
@cindex @samp{%} in constraint
1547
@item %
1548
Declares the instruction to be commutative for this operand and the
1549
following operand.  This means that the compiler may interchange the
1550
two operands if that is the cheapest way to make all operands fit the
1551
constraints.
1552
@ifset INTERNALS
1553
This is often used in patterns for addition instructions
1554
that really have only two operands: the result must go in one of the
1555
arguments.  Here for example, is how the 68000 halfword-add
1556
instruction is defined:
1557
 
1558
@smallexample
1559
(define_insn "addhi3"
1560
  [(set (match_operand:HI 0 "general_operand" "=m,r")
1561
     (plus:HI (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0")
1562
              (match_operand:HI 2 "general_operand" "di,g")))]
1563
  @dots{})
1564
@end smallexample
1565
@end ifset
1566
GCC can only handle one commutative pair in an asm; if you use more,
1567
the compiler may fail.  Note that you need not use the modifier if
1568
the two alternatives are strictly identical; this would only waste
1569
time in the reload pass.  The modifier is not operational after
1570
register allocation, so the result of @code{define_peephole2}
1571
and @code{define_split}s performed after reload cannot rely on
1572
@samp{%} to make the intended insn match.
1573
 
1574
@cindex @samp{#} in constraint
1575
@item #
1576
Says that all following characters, up to the next comma, are to be
1577
ignored as a constraint.  They are significant only for choosing
1578
register preferences.
1579
 
1580
@cindex @samp{*} in constraint
1581
@item *
1582
Says that the following character should be ignored when choosing
1583
register preferences.  @samp{*} has no effect on the meaning of the
1584
constraint as a constraint, and no effect on reloading.
1585
 
1586
@ifset INTERNALS
1587
Here is an example: the 68000 has an instruction to sign-extend a
1588
halfword in a data register, and can also sign-extend a value by
1589
copying it into an address register.  While either kind of register is
1590
acceptable, the constraints on an address-register destination are
1591
less strict, so it is best if register allocation makes an address
1592
register its goal.  Therefore, @samp{*} is used so that the @samp{d}
1593
constraint letter (for data register) is ignored when computing
1594
register preferences.
1595
 
1596
@smallexample
1597
(define_insn "extendhisi2"
1598
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=*d,a")
1599
        (sign_extend:SI
1600
         (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "0,g")))]
1601
  @dots{})
1602
@end smallexample
1603
@end ifset
1604
@end table
1605
 
1606
@node Machine Constraints
1607
@subsection Constraints for Particular Machines
1608
@cindex machine specific constraints
1609
@cindex constraints, machine specific
1610
 
1611
Whenever possible, you should use the general-purpose constraint letters
1612
in @code{asm} arguments, since they will convey meaning more readily to
1613
people reading your code.  Failing that, use the constraint letters
1614
that usually have very similar meanings across architectures.  The most
1615
commonly used constraints are @samp{m} and @samp{r} (for memory and
1616
general-purpose registers respectively; @pxref{Simple Constraints}), and
1617
@samp{I}, usually the letter indicating the most common
1618
immediate-constant format.
1619
 
1620
Each architecture defines additional constraints.  These constraints
1621
are used by the compiler itself for instruction generation, as well as
1622
for @code{asm} statements; therefore, some of the constraints are not
1623
particularly useful for @code{asm}.  Here is a summary of some of the
1624
machine-dependent constraints available on some particular machines;
1625
it includes both constraints that are useful for @code{asm} and
1626
constraints that aren't.  The compiler source file mentioned in the
1627
table heading for each architecture is the definitive reference for
1628
the meanings of that architecture's constraints.
1629
 
1630
@table @emph
1631
@item ARM family---@file{config/arm/arm.h}
1632
@table @code
1633
@item f
1634
Floating-point register
1635
 
1636
@item w
1637
VFP floating-point register
1638
 
1639
@item F
1640
One of the floating-point constants 0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0
1641
or 10.0
1642
 
1643
@item G
1644
Floating-point constant that would satisfy the constraint @samp{F} if it
1645
were negated
1646
 
1647
@item I
1648
Integer that is valid as an immediate operand in a data processing
1649
instruction.  That is, an integer in the range 0 to 255 rotated by a
1650
multiple of 2
1651
 
1652
@item J
1653
Integer in the range @minus{}4095 to 4095
1654
 
1655
@item K
1656
Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when inverted (ones complement)
1657
 
1658
@item L
1659
Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when negated (twos complement)
1660
 
1661
@item M
1662
Integer in the range 0 to 32
1663
 
1664
@item Q
1665
A memory reference where the exact address is in a single register
1666
(`@samp{m}' is preferable for @code{asm} statements)
1667
 
1668
@item R
1669
An item in the constant pool
1670
 
1671
@item S
1672
A symbol in the text segment of the current file
1673
 
1674
@item Uv
1675
A memory reference suitable for VFP load/store insns (reg+constant offset)
1676
 
1677
@item Uy
1678
A memory reference suitable for iWMMXt load/store instructions.
1679
 
1680
@item Uq
1681
A memory reference suitable for the ARMv4 ldrsb instruction.
1682
@end table
1683
 
1684
@item AVR family---@file{config/avr/constraints.md}
1685
@table @code
1686
@item l
1687
Registers from r0 to r15
1688
 
1689
@item a
1690
Registers from r16 to r23
1691
 
1692
@item d
1693
Registers from r16 to r31
1694
 
1695
@item w
1696
Registers from r24 to r31.  These registers can be used in @samp{adiw} command
1697
 
1698
@item e
1699
Pointer register (r26--r31)
1700
 
1701
@item b
1702
Base pointer register (r28--r31)
1703
 
1704
@item q
1705
Stack pointer register (SPH:SPL)
1706
 
1707
@item t
1708
Temporary register r0
1709
 
1710
@item x
1711
Register pair X (r27:r26)
1712
 
1713
@item y
1714
Register pair Y (r29:r28)
1715
 
1716
@item z
1717
Register pair Z (r31:r30)
1718
 
1719
@item I
1720
Constant greater than @minus{}1, less than 64
1721
 
1722
@item J
1723
Constant greater than @minus{}64, less than 1
1724
 
1725
@item K
1726
Constant integer 2
1727
 
1728
@item L
1729
Constant integer 0
1730
 
1731
@item M
1732
Constant that fits in 8 bits
1733
 
1734
@item N
1735
Constant integer @minus{}1
1736
 
1737
@item O
1738
Constant integer 8, 16, or 24
1739
 
1740
@item P
1741
Constant integer 1
1742
 
1743
@item G
1744
A floating point constant 0.0
1745
@end table
1746
 
1747
@item CRX Architecture---@file{config/crx/crx.h}
1748
@table @code
1749
 
1750
@item b
1751
Registers from r0 to r14 (registers without stack pointer)
1752
 
1753
@item l
1754
Register r16 (64-bit accumulator lo register)
1755
 
1756
@item h
1757
Register r17 (64-bit accumulator hi register)
1758
 
1759
@item k
1760
Register pair r16-r17. (64-bit accumulator lo-hi pair)
1761
 
1762
@item I
1763
Constant that fits in 3 bits
1764
 
1765
@item J
1766
Constant that fits in 4 bits
1767
 
1768
@item K
1769
Constant that fits in 5 bits
1770
 
1771
@item L
1772
Constant that is one of -1, 4, -4, 7, 8, 12, 16, 20, 32, 48
1773
 
1774
@item G
1775
Floating point constant that is legal for store immediate
1776
@end table
1777
 
1778
@item PowerPC and IBM RS6000---@file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h}
1779
@table @code
1780
@item b
1781
Address base register
1782
 
1783
@item f
1784
Floating point register
1785
 
1786
@item v
1787
Vector register
1788
 
1789
@item h
1790
@samp{MQ}, @samp{CTR}, or @samp{LINK} register
1791
 
1792
@item q
1793
@samp{MQ} register
1794
 
1795
@item c
1796
@samp{CTR} register
1797
 
1798
@item l
1799
@samp{LINK} register
1800
 
1801
@item x
1802
@samp{CR} register (condition register) number 0
1803
 
1804
@item y
1805
@samp{CR} register (condition register)
1806
 
1807
@item z
1808
@samp{FPMEM} stack memory for FPR-GPR transfers
1809
 
1810
@item I
1811
Signed 16-bit constant
1812
 
1813
@item J
1814
Unsigned 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits (use @samp{L} instead for
1815
@code{SImode} constants)
1816
 
1817
@item K
1818
Unsigned 16-bit constant
1819
 
1820
@item L
1821
Signed 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits
1822
 
1823
@item M
1824
Constant larger than 31
1825
 
1826
@item N
1827
Exact power of 2
1828
 
1829
@item O
1830
Zero
1831
 
1832
@item P
1833
Constant whose negation is a signed 16-bit constant
1834
 
1835
@item G
1836
Floating point constant that can be loaded into a register with one
1837
instruction per word
1838
 
1839
@item Q
1840
Memory operand that is an offset from a register (@samp{m} is preferable
1841
for @code{asm} statements)
1842
 
1843
@item R
1844
AIX TOC entry
1845
 
1846
@item S
1847
Constant suitable as a 64-bit mask operand
1848
 
1849
@item T
1850
Constant suitable as a 32-bit mask operand
1851
 
1852
@item U
1853
System V Release 4 small data area reference
1854
@end table
1855
 
1856
@item MorphoTech family---@file{config/mt/mt.h}
1857
@table @code
1858
@item I
1859
Constant for an arithmetic insn (16-bit signed integer).
1860
 
1861
@item J
1862
The constant 0.
1863
 
1864
@item K
1865
Constant for a logical insn (16-bit zero-extended integer).
1866
 
1867
@item L
1868
A constant that can be loaded with @code{lui} (i.e.@: the bottom 16
1869
bits are zero).
1870
 
1871
@item M
1872
A constant that takes two words to load (i.e.@: not matched by
1873
@code{I}, @code{K}, or @code{L}).
1874
 
1875
@item N
1876
Negative 16-bit constants other than -65536.
1877
 
1878
@item O
1879
A 15-bit signed integer constant.
1880
 
1881
@item P
1882
A positive 16-bit constant.
1883
@end table
1884
 
1885
@item Intel 386---@file{config/i386/constraints.md}
1886
@table @code
1887
@item R
1888
Legacy register---the eight integer registers available on all
1889
i386 processors (@code{a}, @code{b}, @code{c}, @code{d},
1890
@code{si}, @code{di}, @code{bp}, @code{sp}).
1891
 
1892
@item q
1893
Any register accessible as @code{@var{r}l}.  In 32-bit mode, @code{a},
1894
@code{b}, @code{c}, and @code{d}; in 64-bit mode, any integer register.
1895
 
1896
@item Q
1897
Any register accessible as @code{@var{r}h}: @code{a}, @code{b},
1898
@code{c}, and @code{d}.
1899
 
1900
@ifset INTERNALS
1901
@item l
1902
Any register that can be used as the index in a base+index memory
1903
access: that is, any general register except the stack pointer.
1904
@end ifset
1905
 
1906
@item a
1907
The @code{a} register.
1908
 
1909
@item b
1910
The @code{b} register.
1911
 
1912
@item c
1913
The @code{c} register.
1914
 
1915
@item d
1916
The @code{d} register.
1917
 
1918
@item S
1919
The @code{si} register.
1920
 
1921
@item D
1922
The @code{di} register.
1923
 
1924
@item A
1925
The @code{a} and @code{d} registers, as a pair (for instructions that
1926
return half the result in one and half in the other).
1927
 
1928
@item f
1929
Any 80387 floating-point (stack) register.
1930
 
1931
@item t
1932
Top of 80387 floating-point stack (@code{%st(0)}).
1933
 
1934
@item u
1935
Second from top of 80387 floating-point stack (@code{%st(1)}).
1936
 
1937
@item y
1938
Any MMX register.
1939
 
1940
@item x
1941
Any SSE register.
1942
 
1943
@ifset INTERNALS
1944
@item Y
1945
Any SSE2 register.
1946
@end ifset
1947
 
1948
@item I
1949
Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 31, for 32-bit shifts.
1950
 
1951
@item J
1952
Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 63, for 64-bit shifts.
1953
 
1954
@item K
1955
Signed 8-bit integer constant.
1956
 
1957
@item L
1958
@code{0xFF} or @code{0xFFFF}, for andsi as a zero-extending move.
1959
 
1960
@item M
1961
0, 1, 2, or 3 (shifts for the @code{lea} instruction).
1962
 
1963
@item N
1964
Unsigned 8-bit integer constant (for @code{in} and @code{out}
1965
instructions).
1966
 
1967
@ifset INTERNALS
1968
@item O
1969
Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 127, for 128-bit shifts.
1970
@end ifset
1971
 
1972
@item G
1973
Standard 80387 floating point constant.
1974
 
1975
@item C
1976
Standard SSE floating point constant.
1977
 
1978
@item e
1979
32-bit signed integer constant, or a symbolic reference known
1980
to fit that range (for immediate operands in sign-extending x86-64
1981
instructions).
1982
 
1983
@item Z
1984
32-bit unsigned integer constant, or a symbolic reference known
1985
to fit that range (for immediate operands in zero-extending x86-64
1986
instructions).
1987
 
1988
@end table
1989
 
1990
@item Intel IA-64---@file{config/ia64/ia64.h}
1991
@table @code
1992
@item a
1993
General register @code{r0} to @code{r3} for @code{addl} instruction
1994
 
1995
@item b
1996
Branch register
1997
 
1998
@item c
1999
Predicate register (@samp{c} as in ``conditional'')
2000
 
2001
@item d
2002
Application register residing in M-unit
2003
 
2004
@item e
2005
Application register residing in I-unit
2006
 
2007
@item f
2008
Floating-point register
2009
 
2010
@item m
2011
Memory operand.
2012
Remember that @samp{m} allows postincrement and postdecrement which
2013
require printing with @samp{%Pn} on IA-64.
2014
Use @samp{S} to disallow postincrement and postdecrement.
2015
 
2016
@item G
2017
Floating-point constant 0.0 or 1.0
2018
 
2019
@item I
2020
14-bit signed integer constant
2021
 
2022
@item J
2023
22-bit signed integer constant
2024
 
2025
@item K
2026
8-bit signed integer constant for logical instructions
2027
 
2028
@item L
2029
8-bit adjusted signed integer constant for compare pseudo-ops
2030
 
2031
@item M
2032
6-bit unsigned integer constant for shift counts
2033
 
2034
@item N
2035
9-bit signed integer constant for load and store postincrements
2036
 
2037
@item O
2038
The constant zero
2039
 
2040
@item P
2041
 
2042
 
2043
@item Q
2044
Non-volatile memory for floating-point loads and stores
2045
 
2046
@item R
2047
Integer constant in the range 1 to 4 for @code{shladd} instruction
2048
 
2049
@item S
2050
Memory operand except postincrement and postdecrement
2051
@end table
2052
 
2053
@item FRV---@file{config/frv/frv.h}
2054
@table @code
2055
@item a
2056
Register in the class @code{ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2057
 
2058
@item b
2059
Register in the class @code{EVEN_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2060
 
2061
@item c
2062
Register in the class @code{CC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3} and
2063
@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}).
2064
 
2065
@item d
2066
Register in the class @code{GPR_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}).
2067
 
2068
@item e
2069
Register in the class @code{EVEN_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}).
2070
Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine
2071
mode larger than 4 bytes.
2072
 
2073
@item f
2074
Register in the class @code{FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2075
 
2076
@item h
2077
Register in the class @code{FEVEN_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2078
Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine
2079
mode larger than 4 bytes.
2080
 
2081
@item l
2082
Register in the class @code{LR_REG} (the @code{lr} register).
2083
 
2084
@item q
2085
Register in the class @code{QUAD_REGS} (@code{gr2} to @code{gr63}).
2086
Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through
2087
the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes.
2088
 
2089
@item t
2090
Register in the class @code{ICC_REGS} (@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}).
2091
 
2092
@item u
2093
Register in the class @code{FCC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3}).
2094
 
2095
@item v
2096
Register in the class @code{ICR_REGS} (@code{cc4} to @code{cc7}).
2097
 
2098
@item w
2099
Register in the class @code{FCR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc3}).
2100
 
2101
@item x
2102
Register in the class @code{QUAD_FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2103
Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through
2104
the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes.
2105
 
2106
@item z
2107
Register in the class @code{SPR_REGS} (@code{lcr} and @code{lr}).
2108
 
2109
@item A
2110
Register in the class @code{QUAD_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2111
 
2112
@item B
2113
Register in the class @code{ACCG_REGS} (@code{accg0} to @code{accg7}).
2114
 
2115
@item C
2116
Register in the class @code{CR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc7}).
2117
 
2118
@item G
2119
Floating point constant zero
2120
 
2121
@item I
2122
6-bit signed integer constant
2123
 
2124
@item J
2125
10-bit signed integer constant
2126
 
2127
@item L
2128
16-bit signed integer constant
2129
 
2130
@item M
2131
16-bit unsigned integer constant
2132
 
2133
@item N
2134
12-bit signed integer constant that is negative---i.e.@: in the
2135
range of @minus{}2048 to @minus{}1
2136
 
2137
@item O
2138
Constant zero
2139
 
2140
@item P
2141
12-bit signed integer constant that is greater than zero---i.e.@: in the
2142
range of 1 to 2047.
2143
 
2144
@end table
2145
 
2146
@item Blackfin family---@file{config/bfin/bfin.h}
2147
@table @code
2148
@item a
2149
P register
2150
 
2151
@item d
2152
D register
2153
 
2154
@item z
2155
A call clobbered P register.
2156
 
2157
@item D
2158
Even-numbered D register
2159
 
2160
@item W
2161
Odd-numbered D register
2162
 
2163
@item e
2164
Accumulator register.
2165
 
2166
@item A
2167
Even-numbered accumulator register.
2168
 
2169
@item B
2170
Odd-numbered accumulator register.
2171
 
2172
@item b
2173
I register
2174
 
2175
@item v
2176
B register
2177
 
2178
@item f
2179
M register
2180
 
2181
@item c
2182
Registers used for circular buffering, i.e. I, B, or L registers.
2183
 
2184
@item C
2185
The CC register.
2186
 
2187
@item t
2188
LT0 or LT1.
2189
 
2190
@item k
2191
LC0 or LC1.
2192
 
2193
@item u
2194
LB0 or LB1.
2195
 
2196
@item x
2197
Any D, P, B, M, I or L register.
2198
 
2199
@item y
2200
Additional registers typically used only in prologues and epilogues: RETS,
2201
RETN, RETI, RETX, RETE, ASTAT, SEQSTAT and USP.
2202
 
2203
@item w
2204
Any register except accumulators or CC.
2205
 
2206
@item Ksh
2207
Signed 16 bit integer (in the range -32768 to 32767)
2208
 
2209
@item Kuh
2210
Unsigned 16 bit integer (in the range 0 to 65535)
2211
 
2212
@item Ks7
2213
Signed 7 bit integer (in the range -64 to 63)
2214
 
2215
@item Ku7
2216
Unsigned 7 bit integer (in the range 0 to 127)
2217
 
2218
@item Ku5
2219
Unsigned 5 bit integer (in the range 0 to 31)
2220
 
2221
@item Ks4
2222
Signed 4 bit integer (in the range -8 to 7)
2223
 
2224
@item Ks3
2225
Signed 3 bit integer (in the range -3 to 4)
2226
 
2227
@item Ku3
2228
Unsigned 3 bit integer (in the range 0 to 7)
2229
 
2230
@item P@var{n}
2231
Constant @var{n}, where @var{n} is a single-digit constant in the range 0 to 4.
2232
 
2233
@item M1
2234
Constant 255.
2235
 
2236
@item M2
2237
Constant 65535.
2238
 
2239
@item J
2240
An integer constant with exactly a single bit set.
2241
 
2242
@item L
2243
An integer constant with all bits set except exactly one.
2244
 
2245
@item H
2246
 
2247
@item Q
2248
Any SYMBOL_REF.
2249
@end table
2250
 
2251
@item M32C---@file{config/m32c/m32c.c}
2252
@table @code
2253
@item Rsp
2254
@itemx Rfb
2255
@itemx Rsb
2256
@samp{$sp}, @samp{$fb}, @samp{$sb}.
2257
 
2258
@item Rcr
2259
Any control register, when they're 16 bits wide (nothing if control
2260
registers are 24 bits wide)
2261
 
2262
@item Rcl
2263
Any control register, when they're 24 bits wide.
2264
 
2265
@item R0w
2266
@itemx R1w
2267
@itemx R2w
2268
@itemx R3w
2269
$r0, $r1, $r2, $r3.
2270
 
2271
@item R02
2272
$r0 or $r2, or $r2r0 for 32 bit values.
2273
 
2274
@item R13
2275
$r1 or $r3, or $r3r1 for 32 bit values.
2276
 
2277
@item Rdi
2278
A register that can hold a 64 bit value.
2279
 
2280
@item Rhl
2281
$r0 or $r1 (registers with addressable high/low bytes)
2282
 
2283
@item R23
2284
$r2 or $r3
2285
 
2286
@item Raa
2287
Address registers
2288
 
2289
@item Raw
2290
Address registers when they're 16 bits wide.
2291
 
2292
@item Ral
2293
Address registers when they're 24 bits wide.
2294
 
2295
@item Rqi
2296
Registers that can hold QI values.
2297
 
2298
@item Rad
2299
Registers that can be used with displacements ($a0, $a1, $sb).
2300
 
2301
@item Rsi
2302
Registers that can hold 32 bit values.
2303
 
2304
@item Rhi
2305
Registers that can hold 16 bit values.
2306
 
2307
@item Rhc
2308
Registers chat can hold 16 bit values, including all control
2309
registers.
2310
 
2311
@item Rra
2312
$r0 through R1, plus $a0 and $a1.
2313
 
2314
@item Rfl
2315
The flags register.
2316
 
2317
@item Rmm
2318
The memory-based pseudo-registers $mem0 through $mem15.
2319
 
2320
@item Rpi
2321
Registers that can hold pointers (16 bit registers for r8c, m16c; 24
2322
bit registers for m32cm, m32c).
2323
 
2324
@item Rpa
2325
Matches multiple registers in a PARALLEL to form a larger register.
2326
Used to match function return values.
2327
 
2328
@item Is3
2329
-8 @dots{} 7
2330
 
2331
@item IS1
2332
-128 @dots{} 127
2333
 
2334
@item IS2
2335
-32768 @dots{} 32767
2336
 
2337
@item IU2
2338
 
2339
 
2340
@item In4
2341
-8 @dots{} -1 or 1 @dots{} 8
2342
 
2343
@item In5
2344
-16 @dots{} -1 or 1 @dots{} 16
2345
 
2346
@item In6
2347
-32 @dots{} -1 or 1 @dots{} 32
2348
 
2349
@item IM2
2350
-65536 @dots{} -1
2351
 
2352
@item Ilb
2353
An 8 bit value with exactly one bit set.
2354
 
2355
@item Ilw
2356
A 16 bit value with exactly one bit set.
2357
 
2358
@item Sd
2359
The common src/dest memory addressing modes.
2360
 
2361
@item Sa
2362
Memory addressed using $a0 or $a1.
2363
 
2364
@item Si
2365
Memory addressed with immediate addresses.
2366
 
2367
@item Ss
2368
Memory addressed using the stack pointer ($sp).
2369
 
2370
@item Sf
2371
Memory addressed using the frame base register ($fb).
2372
 
2373
@item Ss
2374
Memory addressed using the small base register ($sb).
2375
 
2376
@item S1
2377
$r1h
2378
@end table
2379
 
2380
@item MIPS---@file{config/mips/constraints.md}
2381
@table @code
2382
@item d
2383
An address register.  This is equivalent to @code{r} unless
2384
generating MIPS16 code.
2385
 
2386
@item f
2387
A floating-point register (if available).
2388
 
2389
@item h
2390
The @code{hi} register.
2391
 
2392
@item l
2393
The @code{lo} register.
2394
 
2395
@item x
2396
The @code{hi} and @code{lo} registers.
2397
 
2398
@item c
2399
A register suitable for use in an indirect jump.  This will always be
2400
@code{$25} for @option{-mabicalls}.
2401
 
2402
@item y
2403
Equivalent to @code{r}; retained for backwards compatibility.
2404
 
2405
@item z
2406
A floating-point condition code register.
2407
 
2408
@item I
2409
A signed 16-bit constant (for arithmetic instructions).
2410
 
2411
@item J
2412
Integer zero.
2413
 
2414
@item K
2415
An unsigned 16-bit constant (for logic instructions).
2416
 
2417
@item L
2418
A signed 32-bit constant in which the lower 16 bits are zero.
2419
Such constants can be loaded using @code{lui}.
2420
 
2421
@item M
2422
A constant that cannot be loaded using @code{lui}, @code{addiu}
2423
or @code{ori}.
2424
 
2425
@item N
2426
A constant in the range -65535 to -1 (inclusive).
2427
 
2428
@item O
2429
A signed 15-bit constant.
2430
 
2431
@item P
2432
A constant in the range 1 to 65535 (inclusive).
2433
 
2434
@item G
2435
Floating-point zero.
2436
 
2437
@item R
2438
An address that can be used in a non-macro load or store.
2439
@end table
2440
 
2441
@item Motorola 680x0---@file{config/m68k/m68k.h}
2442
@table @code
2443
@item a
2444
Address register
2445
 
2446
@item d
2447
Data register
2448
 
2449
@item f
2450
68881 floating-point register, if available
2451
 
2452
@item I
2453
Integer in the range 1 to 8
2454
 
2455
@item J
2456
16-bit signed number
2457
 
2458
@item K
2459
Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x80
2460
 
2461
@item L
2462
Integer in the range @minus{}8 to @minus{}1
2463
 
2464
@item M
2465
Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x100
2466
 
2467
@item G
2468
Floating point constant that is not a 68881 constant
2469
@end table
2470
 
2471
@item Motorola 68HC11 & 68HC12 families---@file{config/m68hc11/m68hc11.h}
2472
@table @code
2473
@item a
2474
Register `a'
2475
 
2476
@item b
2477
Register `b'
2478
 
2479
@item d
2480
Register `d'
2481
 
2482
@item q
2483
An 8-bit register
2484
 
2485
@item t
2486
Temporary soft register _.tmp
2487
 
2488
@item u
2489
A soft register _.d1 to _.d31
2490
 
2491
@item w
2492
Stack pointer register
2493
 
2494
@item x
2495
Register `x'
2496
 
2497
@item y
2498
Register `y'
2499
 
2500
@item z
2501
Pseudo register `z' (replaced by `x' or `y' at the end)
2502
 
2503
@item A
2504
An address register: x, y or z
2505
 
2506
@item B
2507
An address register: x or y
2508
 
2509
@item D
2510
Register pair (x:d) to form a 32-bit value
2511
 
2512
@item L
2513
Constants in the range @minus{}65536 to 65535
2514
 
2515
@item M
2516
Constants whose 16-bit low part is zero
2517
 
2518
@item N
2519
Constant integer 1 or @minus{}1
2520
 
2521
@item O
2522
Constant integer 16
2523
 
2524
@item P
2525
Constants in the range @minus{}8 to 2
2526
 
2527
@end table
2528
 
2529
@need 1000
2530
@item SPARC---@file{config/sparc/sparc.h}
2531
@table @code
2532
@item f
2533
Floating-point register on the SPARC-V8 architecture and
2534
lower floating-point register on the SPARC-V9 architecture.
2535
 
2536
@item e
2537
Floating-point register.  It is equivalent to @samp{f} on the
2538
SPARC-V8 architecture and contains both lower and upper
2539
floating-point registers on the SPARC-V9 architecture.
2540
 
2541
@item c
2542
Floating-point condition code register.
2543
 
2544
@item d
2545
Lower floating-point register.  It is only valid on the SPARC-V9
2546
architecture when the Visual Instruction Set is available.
2547
 
2548
@item b
2549
Floating-point register.  It is only valid on the SPARC-V9 architecture
2550
when the Visual Instruction Set is available.
2551
 
2552
@item h
2553
64-bit global or out register for the SPARC-V8+ architecture.
2554
 
2555
@item I
2556
Signed 13-bit constant
2557
 
2558
@item J
2559
Zero
2560
 
2561
@item K
2562
32-bit constant with the low 12 bits clear (a constant that can be
2563
loaded with the @code{sethi} instruction)
2564
 
2565
@item L
2566
A constant in the range supported by @code{movcc} instructions
2567
 
2568
@item M
2569
A constant in the range supported by @code{movrcc} instructions
2570
 
2571
@item N
2572
Same as @samp{K}, except that it verifies that bits that are not in the
2573
lower 32-bit range are all zero.  Must be used instead of @samp{K} for
2574
modes wider than @code{SImode}
2575
 
2576
@item O
2577
The constant 4096
2578
 
2579
@item G
2580
Floating-point zero
2581
 
2582
@item H
2583
Signed 13-bit constant, sign-extended to 32 or 64 bits
2584
 
2585
@item Q
2586
Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2587
be moved into an integer register using a single sethi
2588
instruction
2589
 
2590
@item R
2591
Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2592
be moved into an integer register using a single mov
2593
instruction
2594
 
2595
@item S
2596
Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2597
be moved into an integer register using a high/lo_sum
2598
instruction sequence
2599
 
2600
@item T
2601
Memory address aligned to an 8-byte boundary
2602
 
2603
@item U
2604
Even register
2605
 
2606
@item W
2607
Memory address for @samp{e} constraint registers
2608
 
2609
@item Y
2610
Vector zero
2611
 
2612
@end table
2613
 
2614
@item TMS320C3x/C4x---@file{config/c4x/c4x.h}
2615
@table @code
2616
@item a
2617
Auxiliary (address) register (ar0-ar7)
2618
 
2619
@item b
2620
Stack pointer register (sp)
2621
 
2622
@item c
2623
Standard (32-bit) precision integer register
2624
 
2625
@item f
2626
Extended (40-bit) precision register (r0-r11)
2627
 
2628
@item k
2629
Block count register (bk)
2630
 
2631
@item q
2632
Extended (40-bit) precision low register (r0-r7)
2633
 
2634
@item t
2635
Extended (40-bit) precision register (r0-r1)
2636
 
2637
@item u
2638
Extended (40-bit) precision register (r2-r3)
2639
 
2640
@item v
2641
Repeat count register (rc)
2642
 
2643
@item x
2644
Index register (ir0-ir1)
2645
 
2646
@item y
2647
Status (condition code) register (st)
2648
 
2649
@item z
2650
Data page register (dp)
2651
 
2652
@item G
2653
Floating-point zero
2654
 
2655
@item H
2656
Immediate 16-bit floating-point constant
2657
 
2658
@item I
2659
Signed 16-bit constant
2660
 
2661
@item J
2662
Signed 8-bit constant
2663
 
2664
@item K
2665
Signed 5-bit constant
2666
 
2667
@item L
2668
Unsigned 16-bit constant
2669
 
2670
@item M
2671
Unsigned 8-bit constant
2672
 
2673
@item N
2674
Ones complement of unsigned 16-bit constant
2675
 
2676
@item O
2677
High 16-bit constant (32-bit constant with 16 LSBs zero)
2678
 
2679
@item Q
2680
Indirect memory reference with signed 8-bit or index register displacement
2681
 
2682
@item R
2683
Indirect memory reference with unsigned 5-bit displacement
2684
 
2685
@item S
2686
Indirect memory reference with 1 bit or index register displacement
2687
 
2688
@item T
2689
Direct memory reference
2690
 
2691
@item U
2692
Symbolic address
2693
 
2694
@end table
2695
 
2696
@item S/390 and zSeries---@file{config/s390/s390.h}
2697
@table @code
2698
@item a
2699
Address register (general purpose register except r0)
2700
 
2701
@item c
2702
Condition code register
2703
 
2704
@item d
2705
Data register (arbitrary general purpose register)
2706
 
2707
@item f
2708
Floating-point register
2709
 
2710
@item I
2711
Unsigned 8-bit constant (0--255)
2712
 
2713
@item J
2714
Unsigned 12-bit constant (0--4095)
2715
 
2716
@item K
2717
Signed 16-bit constant (@minus{}32768--32767)
2718
 
2719
@item L
2720
Value appropriate as displacement.
2721
@table @code
2722
       @item (0..4095)
2723
       for short displacement
2724
       @item (-524288..524287)
2725
       for long displacement
2726
@end table
2727
 
2728
@item M
2729
Constant integer with a value of 0x7fffffff.
2730
 
2731
@item N
2732
Multiple letter constraint followed by 4 parameter letters.
2733
@table @code
2734
         @item 0..9:
2735
         number of the part counting from most to least significant
2736
         @item H,Q:
2737
         mode of the part
2738
         @item D,S,H:
2739
         mode of the containing operand
2740
         @item 0,F:
2741
         value of the other parts (F---all bits set)
2742
@end table
2743
The constraint matches if the specified part of a constant
2744
has a value different from it's other parts.
2745
 
2746
@item Q
2747
Memory reference without index register and with short displacement.
2748
 
2749
@item R
2750
Memory reference with index register and short displacement.
2751
 
2752
@item S
2753
Memory reference without index register but with long displacement.
2754
 
2755
@item T
2756
Memory reference with index register and long displacement.
2757
 
2758
@item U
2759
Pointer with short displacement.
2760
 
2761
@item W
2762
Pointer with long displacement.
2763
 
2764
@item Y
2765
Shift count operand.
2766
 
2767
@end table
2768
 
2769
@item Score family---@file{config/score/score.h}
2770
@table @code
2771
@item d
2772
Registers from r0 to r32.
2773
 
2774
@item e
2775
Registers from r0 to r16.
2776
 
2777
@item t
2778
r8---r11 or r22---r27 registers.
2779
 
2780
@item h
2781
hi register.
2782
 
2783
@item l
2784
lo register.
2785
 
2786
@item x
2787
hi + lo register.
2788
 
2789
@item q
2790
cnt register.
2791
 
2792
@item y
2793
lcb register.
2794
 
2795
@item z
2796
scb register.
2797
 
2798
@item a
2799
cnt + lcb + scb register.
2800
 
2801
@item c
2802
cr0---cr15 register.
2803
 
2804
@item b
2805
cp1 registers.
2806
 
2807
@item f
2808
cp2 registers.
2809
 
2810
@item i
2811
cp3 registers.
2812
 
2813
@item j
2814
cp1 + cp2 + cp3 registers.
2815
 
2816
@item I
2817
High 16-bit constant (32-bit constant with 16 LSBs zero).
2818
 
2819
@item J
2820
Unsigned 5 bit integer (in the range 0 to 31).
2821
 
2822
@item K
2823
Unsigned 16 bit integer (in the range 0 to 65535).
2824
 
2825
@item L
2826
Signed 16 bit integer (in the range @minus{}32768 to 32767).
2827
 
2828
@item M
2829
Unsigned 14 bit integer (in the range 0 to 16383).
2830
 
2831
@item N
2832
Signed 14 bit integer (in the range @minus{}8192 to 8191).
2833
 
2834
@item Z
2835
Any SYMBOL_REF.
2836
@end table
2837
 
2838
@item Xstormy16---@file{config/stormy16/stormy16.h}
2839
@table @code
2840
@item a
2841
Register r0.
2842
 
2843
@item b
2844
Register r1.
2845
 
2846
@item c
2847
Register r2.
2848
 
2849
@item d
2850
Register r8.
2851
 
2852
@item e
2853
Registers r0 through r7.
2854
 
2855
@item t
2856
Registers r0 and r1.
2857
 
2858
@item y
2859
The carry register.
2860
 
2861
@item z
2862
Registers r8 and r9.
2863
 
2864
@item I
2865
A constant between 0 and 3 inclusive.
2866
 
2867
@item J
2868
A constant that has exactly one bit set.
2869
 
2870
@item K
2871
A constant that has exactly one bit clear.
2872
 
2873
@item L
2874
A constant between 0 and 255 inclusive.
2875
 
2876
@item M
2877
A constant between @minus{}255 and 0 inclusive.
2878
 
2879
@item N
2880
A constant between @minus{}3 and 0 inclusive.
2881
 
2882
@item O
2883
A constant between 1 and 4 inclusive.
2884
 
2885
@item P
2886
A constant between @minus{}4 and @minus{}1 inclusive.
2887
 
2888
@item Q
2889
A memory reference that is a stack push.
2890
 
2891
@item R
2892
A memory reference that is a stack pop.
2893
 
2894
@item S
2895
A memory reference that refers to a constant address of known value.
2896
 
2897
@item T
2898
The register indicated by Rx (not implemented yet).
2899
 
2900
@item U
2901
A constant that is not between 2 and 15 inclusive.
2902
 
2903
@item Z
2904
The constant 0.
2905
 
2906
@end table
2907
 
2908
@item Xtensa---@file{config/xtensa/xtensa.h}
2909
@table @code
2910
@item a
2911
General-purpose 32-bit register
2912
 
2913
@item b
2914
One-bit boolean register
2915
 
2916
@item A
2917
MAC16 40-bit accumulator register
2918
 
2919
@item I
2920
Signed 12-bit integer constant, for use in MOVI instructions
2921
 
2922
@item J
2923
Signed 8-bit integer constant, for use in ADDI instructions
2924
 
2925
@item K
2926
Integer constant valid for BccI instructions
2927
 
2928
@item L
2929
Unsigned constant valid for BccUI instructions
2930
 
2931
@end table
2932
 
2933
@end table
2934
 
2935
@ifset INTERNALS
2936
@node Define Constraints
2937
@subsection Defining Machine-Specific Constraints
2938
@cindex defining constraints
2939
@cindex constraints, defining
2940
 
2941
Machine-specific constraints fall into two categories: register and
2942
non-register constraints.  Within the latter category, constraints
2943
which allow subsets of all possible memory or address operands should
2944
be specially marked, to give @code{reload} more information.
2945
 
2946
Machine-specific constraints can be given names of arbitrary length,
2947
but they must be entirely composed of letters, digits, underscores
2948
(@samp{_}), and angle brackets (@samp{< >}).  Like C identifiers, they
2949
must begin with a letter or underscore.
2950
 
2951
In order to avoid ambiguity in operand constraint strings, no
2952
constraint can have a name that begins with any other constraint's
2953
name.  For example, if @code{x} is defined as a constraint name,
2954
@code{xy} may not be, and vice versa.  As a consequence of this rule,
2955
no constraint may begin with one of the generic constraint letters:
2956
@samp{E F V X g i m n o p r s}.
2957
 
2958
Register constraints correspond directly to register classes.
2959
@xref{Register Classes}.  There is thus not much flexibility in their
2960
definitions.
2961
 
2962
@deffn {MD Expression} define_register_constraint name regclass docstring
2963
All three arguments are string constants.
2964
@var{name} is the name of the constraint, as it will appear in
2965
@code{match_operand} expressions.  @var{regclass} can be either the
2966
name of the corresponding register class (@pxref{Register Classes}),
2967
or a C expression which evaluates to the appropriate register class.
2968
If it is an expression, it must have no side effects, and it cannot
2969
look at the operand.  The usual use of expressions is to map some
2970
register constraints to @code{NO_REGS} when the register class
2971
is not available on a given subarchitecture.
2972
 
2973
@var{docstring} is a sentence documenting the meaning of the
2974
constraint.  Docstrings are explained further below.
2975
@end deffn
2976
 
2977
Non-register constraints are more like predicates: the constraint
2978
definition gives a Boolean expression which indicates whether the
2979
constraint matches.
2980
 
2981
@deffn {MD Expression} define_constraint name docstring exp
2982
The @var{name} and @var{docstring} arguments are the same as for
2983
@code{define_register_constraint}, but note that the docstring comes
2984
immediately after the name for these expressions.  @var{exp} is an RTL
2985
expression, obeying the same rules as the RTL expressions in predicate
2986
definitions.  @xref{Defining Predicates}, for details.  If it
2987
evaluates true, the constraint matches; if it evaluates false, it
2988
doesn't. Constraint expressions should indicate which RTL codes they
2989
might match, just like predicate expressions.
2990
 
2991
@code{match_test} C expressions have access to the
2992
following variables:
2993
 
2994
@table @var
2995
@item op
2996
The RTL object defining the operand.
2997
@item mode
2998
The machine mode of @var{op}.
2999
@item ival
3000
@samp{INTVAL (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is a @code{const_int}.
3001
@item hval
3002
@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is an integer
3003
@code{const_double}.
3004
@item lval
3005
@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is an integer
3006
@code{const_double}.
3007
@item rval
3008
@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_REAL_VALUE (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is a floating-point
3009
@code{const_double}.
3010
@end table
3011
 
3012
The @var{*val} variables should only be used once another piece of the
3013
expression has verified that @var{op} is the appropriate kind of RTL
3014
object.
3015
@end deffn
3016
 
3017
Most non-register constraints should be defined with
3018
@code{define_constraint}.  The remaining two definition expressions
3019
are only appropriate for constraints that should be handled specially
3020
by @code{reload} if they fail to match.
3021
 
3022
@deffn {MD Expression} define_memory_constraint name docstring exp
3023
Use this expression for constraints that match a subset of all memory
3024
operands: that is, @code{reload} can make them match by converting the
3025
operand to the form @samp{@w{(mem (reg @var{X}))}}, where @var{X} is a
3026
base register (from the register class specified by
3027
@code{BASE_REG_CLASS}, @pxref{Register Classes}).
3028
 
3029
For example, on the S/390, some instructions do not accept arbitrary
3030
memory references, but only those that do not make use of an index
3031
register.  The constraint letter @samp{Q} is defined to represent a
3032
memory address of this type.  If @samp{Q} is defined with
3033
@code{define_memory_constraint}, a @samp{Q} constraint can handle any
3034
memory operand, because @code{reload} knows it can simply copy the
3035
memory address into a base register if required.  This is analogous to
3036
the way a @samp{o} constraint can handle any memory operand.
3037
 
3038
The syntax and semantics are otherwise identical to
3039
@code{define_constraint}.
3040
@end deffn
3041
 
3042
@deffn {MD Expression} define_address_constraint name docstring exp
3043
Use this expression for constraints that match a subset of all address
3044
operands: that is, @code{reload} can make the constraint match by
3045
converting the operand to the form @samp{@w{(reg @var{X})}}, again
3046
with @var{X} a base register.
3047
 
3048
Constraints defined with @code{define_address_constraint} can only be
3049
used with the @code{address_operand} predicate, or machine-specific
3050
predicates that work the same way.  They are treated analogously to
3051
the generic @samp{p} constraint.
3052
 
3053
The syntax and semantics are otherwise identical to
3054
@code{define_constraint}.
3055
@end deffn
3056
 
3057
For historical reasons, names beginning with the letters @samp{G H}
3058
are reserved for constraints that match only @code{const_double}s, and
3059
names beginning with the letters @samp{I J K L M N O P} are reserved
3060
for constraints that match only @code{const_int}s.  This may change in
3061
the future.  For the time being, constraints with these names must be
3062
written in a stylized form, so that @code{genpreds} can tell you did
3063
it correctly:
3064
 
3065
@smallexample
3066
@group
3067
(define_constraint "[@var{GHIJKLMNOP}]@dots{}"
3068
  "@var{doc}@dots{}"
3069
  (and (match_code "const_int")  ; @r{@code{const_double} for G/H}
3070
       @var{condition}@dots{}))            ; @r{usually a @code{match_test}}
3071
@end group
3072
@end smallexample
3073
@c the semicolons line up in the formatted manual
3074
 
3075
It is fine to use names beginning with other letters for constraints
3076
that match @code{const_double}s or @code{const_int}s.
3077
 
3078
Each docstring in a constraint definition should be one or more complete
3079
sentences, marked up in Texinfo format.  @emph{They are currently unused.}
3080
In the future they will be copied into the GCC manual, in @ref{Machine
3081
Constraints}, replacing the hand-maintained tables currently found in
3082
that section.  Also, in the future the compiler may use this to give
3083
more helpful diagnostics when poor choice of @code{asm} constraints
3084
causes a reload failure.
3085
 
3086
If you put the pseudo-Texinfo directive @samp{@@internal} at the
3087
beginning of a docstring, then (in the future) it will appear only in
3088
the internals manual's version of the machine-specific constraint tables.
3089
Use this for constraints that should not appear in @code{asm} statements.
3090
 
3091
@node C Constraint Interface
3092
@subsection Testing constraints from C
3093
@cindex testing constraints
3094
@cindex constraints, testing
3095
 
3096
It is occasionally useful to test a constraint from C code rather than
3097
implicitly via the constraint string in a @code{match_operand}.  The
3098
generated file @file{tm_p.h} declares a few interfaces for working
3099
with machine-specific constraints.  None of these interfaces work with
3100
the generic constraints described in @ref{Simple Constraints}.  This
3101
may change in the future.
3102
 
3103
@strong{Warning:} @file{tm_p.h} may declare other functions that
3104
operate on constraints, besides the ones documented here.  Do not use
3105
those functions from machine-dependent code.  They exist to implement
3106
the old constraint interface that machine-independent components of
3107
the compiler still expect.  They will change or disappear in the
3108
future.
3109
 
3110
Some valid constraint names are not valid C identifiers, so there is a
3111
mangling scheme for referring to them from C@.  Constraint names that
3112
do not contain angle brackets or underscores are left unchanged.
3113
Underscores are doubled, each @samp{<} is replaced with @samp{_l}, and
3114
each @samp{>} with @samp{_g}.  Here are some examples:
3115
 
3116
@c the @c's prevent double blank lines in the printed manual.
3117
@example
3118
@multitable {Original} {Mangled}
3119
@item @strong{Original} @tab @strong{Mangled}  @c
3120
@item @code{x}     @tab @code{x}       @c
3121
@item @code{P42x}  @tab @code{P42x}    @c
3122
@item @code{P4_x}  @tab @code{P4__x}   @c
3123
@item @code{P4>x}  @tab @code{P4_gx}   @c
3124
@item @code{P4>>}  @tab @code{P4_g_g}  @c
3125
@item @code{P4_g>} @tab @code{P4__g_g} @c
3126
@end multitable
3127
@end example
3128
 
3129
Throughout this section, the variable @var{c} is either a constraint
3130
in the abstract sense, or a constant from @code{enum constraint_num};
3131
the variable @var{m} is a mangled constraint name (usually as part of
3132
a larger identifier).
3133
 
3134
@deftp Enum constraint_num
3135
For each machine-specific constraint, there is a corresponding
3136
enumeration constant: @samp{CONSTRAINT_} plus the mangled name of the
3137
constraint.  Functions that take an @code{enum constraint_num} as an
3138
argument expect one of these constants.
3139
 
3140
Machine-independent constraints do not have associated constants.
3141
This may change in the future.
3142
@end deftp
3143
 
3144
@deftypefun {inline bool} satisfies_constraint_@var{m} (rtx @var{exp})
3145
For each machine-specific, non-register constraint @var{m}, there is
3146
one of these functions; it returns @code{true} if @var{exp} satisfies the
3147
constraint.  These functions are only visible if @file{rtl.h} was included
3148
before @file{tm_p.h}.
3149
@end deftypefun
3150
 
3151
@deftypefun bool constraint_satisfied_p (rtx @var{exp}, enum constraint_num @var{c})
3152
Like the @code{satisfies_constraint_@var{m}} functions, but the
3153
constraint to test is given as an argument, @var{c}.  If @var{c}
3154
specifies a register constraint, this function will always return
3155
@code{false}.
3156
@end deftypefun
3157
 
3158
@deftypefun {enum reg_class} regclass_for_constraint (enum constraint_num @var{c})
3159
Returns the register class associated with @var{c}.  If @var{c} is not
3160
a register constraint, or those registers are not available for the
3161
currently selected subtarget, returns @code{NO_REGS}.
3162
@end deftypefun
3163
 
3164
Here is an example use of @code{satisfies_constraint_@var{m}}.  In
3165
peephole optimizations (@pxref{Peephole Definitions}), operand
3166
constraint strings are ignored, so if there are relevant constraints,
3167
they must be tested in the C condition.  In the example, the
3168
optimization is applied if operand 2 does @emph{not} satisfy the
3169
@samp{K} constraint.  (This is a simplified version of a peephole
3170
definition from the i386 machine description.)
3171
 
3172
@smallexample
3173
(define_peephole2
3174
  [(match_scratch:SI 3 "r")
3175
   (set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
3176
        (mult:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "memory_operand" "")
3177
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "immediate_operand" "")))]
3178
 
3179
  "!satisfies_constraint_K (operands[2])"
3180
 
3181
  [(set (match_dup 3) (match_dup 1))
3182
   (set (match_dup 0) (mult:SI (match_dup 3) (match_dup 2)))]
3183
 
3184
  "")
3185
@end smallexample
3186
 
3187
@node Standard Names
3188
@section Standard Pattern Names For Generation
3189
@cindex standard pattern names
3190
@cindex pattern names
3191
@cindex names, pattern
3192
 
3193
Here is a table of the instruction names that are meaningful in the RTL
3194
generation pass of the compiler.  Giving one of these names to an
3195
instruction pattern tells the RTL generation pass that it can use the
3196
pattern to accomplish a certain task.
3197
 
3198
@table @asis
3199
@cindex @code{mov@var{m}} instruction pattern
3200
@item @samp{mov@var{m}}
3201
Here @var{m} stands for a two-letter machine mode name, in lowercase.
3202
This instruction pattern moves data with that machine mode from operand
3203
1 to operand 0.  For example, @samp{movsi} moves full-word data.
3204
 
3205
If operand 0 is a @code{subreg} with mode @var{m} of a register whose
3206
own mode is wider than @var{m}, the effect of this instruction is
3207
to store the specified value in the part of the register that corresponds
3208
to mode @var{m}.  Bits outside of @var{m}, but which are within the
3209
same target word as the @code{subreg} are undefined.  Bits which are
3210
outside the target word are left unchanged.
3211
 
3212
This class of patterns is special in several ways.  First of all, each
3213
of these names up to and including full word size @emph{must} be defined,
3214
because there is no other way to copy a datum from one place to another.
3215
If there are patterns accepting operands in larger modes,
3216
@samp{mov@var{m}} must be defined for integer modes of those sizes.
3217
 
3218
Second, these patterns are not used solely in the RTL generation pass.
3219
Even the reload pass can generate move insns to copy values from stack
3220
slots into temporary registers.  When it does so, one of the operands is
3221
a hard register and the other is an operand that can need to be reloaded
3222
into a register.
3223
 
3224
@findex force_reg
3225
Therefore, when given such a pair of operands, the pattern must generate
3226
RTL which needs no reloading and needs no temporary registers---no
3227
registers other than the operands.  For example, if you support the
3228
pattern with a @code{define_expand}, then in such a case the
3229
@code{define_expand} mustn't call @code{force_reg} or any other such
3230
function which might generate new pseudo registers.
3231
 
3232
This requirement exists even for subword modes on a RISC machine where
3233
fetching those modes from memory normally requires several insns and
3234
some temporary registers.
3235
 
3236
@findex change_address
3237
During reload a memory reference with an invalid address may be passed
3238
as an operand.  Such an address will be replaced with a valid address
3239
later in the reload pass.  In this case, nothing may be done with the
3240
address except to use it as it stands.  If it is copied, it will not be
3241
replaced with a valid address.  No attempt should be made to make such
3242
an address into a valid address and no routine (such as
3243
@code{change_address}) that will do so may be called.  Note that
3244
@code{general_operand} will fail when applied to such an address.
3245
 
3246
@findex reload_in_progress
3247
The global variable @code{reload_in_progress} (which must be explicitly
3248
declared if required) can be used to determine whether such special
3249
handling is required.
3250
 
3251
The variety of operands that have reloads depends on the rest of the
3252
machine description, but typically on a RISC machine these can only be
3253
pseudo registers that did not get hard registers, while on other
3254
machines explicit memory references will get optional reloads.
3255
 
3256
If a scratch register is required to move an object to or from memory,
3257
it can be allocated using @code{gen_reg_rtx} prior to life analysis.
3258
 
3259
If there are cases which need scratch registers during or after reload,
3260
you must provide an appropriate secondary_reload target hook.
3261
 
3262
@findex no_new_pseudos
3263
The global variable @code{no_new_pseudos} can be used to determine if it
3264
is unsafe to create new pseudo registers.  If this variable is nonzero, then
3265
it is unsafe to call @code{gen_reg_rtx} to allocate a new pseudo.
3266
 
3267
The constraints on a @samp{mov@var{m}} must permit moving any hard
3268
register to any other hard register provided that
3269
@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} permits mode @var{m} in both registers and
3270
@code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their classes returns a value of 2.
3271
 
3272
It is obligatory to support floating point @samp{mov@var{m}}
3273
instructions into and out of any registers that can hold fixed point
3274
values, because unions and structures (which have modes @code{SImode} or
3275
@code{DImode}) can be in those registers and they may have floating
3276
point members.
3277
 
3278
There may also be a need to support fixed point @samp{mov@var{m}}
3279
instructions in and out of floating point registers.  Unfortunately, I
3280
have forgotten why this was so, and I don't know whether it is still
3281
true.  If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} rejects fixed point values in
3282
floating point registers, then the constraints of the fixed point
3283
@samp{mov@var{m}} instructions must be designed to avoid ever trying to
3284
reload into a floating point register.
3285
 
3286
@cindex @code{reload_in} instruction pattern
3287
@cindex @code{reload_out} instruction pattern
3288
@item @samp{reload_in@var{m}}
3289
@itemx @samp{reload_out@var{m}}
3290
These named patterns have been obsoleted by the target hook
3291
@code{secondary_reload}.
3292
 
3293
Like @samp{mov@var{m}}, but used when a scratch register is required to
3294
move between operand 0 and operand 1.  Operand 2 describes the scratch
3295
register.  See the discussion of the @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS}
3296
macro in @pxref{Register Classes}.
3297
 
3298
There are special restrictions on the form of the @code{match_operand}s
3299
used in these patterns.  First, only the predicate for the reload
3300
operand is examined, i.e., @code{reload_in} examines operand 1, but not
3301
the predicates for operand 0 or 2.  Second, there may be only one
3302
alternative in the constraints.  Third, only a single register class
3303
letter may be used for the constraint; subsequent constraint letters
3304
are ignored.  As a special exception, an empty constraint string
3305
matches the @code{ALL_REGS} register class.  This may relieve ports
3306
of the burden of defining an @code{ALL_REGS} constraint letter just
3307
for these patterns.
3308
 
3309
@cindex @code{movstrict@var{m}} instruction pattern
3310
@item @samp{movstrict@var{m}}
3311
Like @samp{mov@var{m}} except that if operand 0 is a @code{subreg}
3312
with mode @var{m} of a register whose natural mode is wider,
3313
the @samp{movstrict@var{m}} instruction is guaranteed not to alter
3314
any of the register except the part which belongs to mode @var{m}.
3315
 
3316
@cindex @code{movmisalign@var{m}} instruction pattern
3317
@item @samp{movmisalign@var{m}}
3318
This variant of a move pattern is designed to load or store a value
3319
from a memory address that is not naturally aligned for its mode.
3320
For a store, the memory will be in operand 0; for a load, the memory
3321
will be in operand 1.  The other operand is guaranteed not to be a
3322
memory, so that it's easy to tell whether this is a load or store.
3323
 
3324
This pattern is used by the autovectorizer, and when expanding a
3325
@code{MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF} expression.
3326
 
3327
@cindex @code{load_multiple} instruction pattern
3328
@item @samp{load_multiple}
3329
Load several consecutive memory locations into consecutive registers.
3330
Operand 0 is the first of the consecutive registers, operand 1
3331
is the first memory location, and operand 2 is a constant: the
3332
number of consecutive registers.
3333
 
3334
Define this only if the target machine really has such an instruction;
3335
do not define this if the most efficient way of loading consecutive
3336
registers from memory is to do them one at a time.
3337
 
3338
On some machines, there are restrictions as to which consecutive
3339
registers can be stored into memory, such as particular starting or
3340
ending register numbers or only a range of valid counts.  For those
3341
machines, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
3342
and make the pattern fail if the restrictions are not met.
3343
 
3344
Write the generated insn as a @code{parallel} with elements being a
3345
@code{set} of one register from the appropriate memory location (you may
3346
also need @code{use} or @code{clobber} elements).  Use a
3347
@code{match_parallel} (@pxref{RTL Template}) to recognize the insn.  See
3348
@file{rs6000.md} for examples of the use of this insn pattern.
3349
 
3350
@cindex @samp{store_multiple} instruction pattern
3351
@item @samp{store_multiple}
3352
Similar to @samp{load_multiple}, but store several consecutive registers
3353
into consecutive memory locations.  Operand 0 is the first of the
3354
consecutive memory locations, operand 1 is the first register, and
3355
operand 2 is a constant: the number of consecutive registers.
3356
 
3357
@cindex @code{vec_set@var{m}} instruction pattern
3358
@item @samp{vec_set@var{m}}
3359
Set given field in the vector value.  Operand 0 is the vector to modify,
3360
operand 1 is new value of field and operand 2 specify the field index.
3361
 
3362
@cindex @code{vec_extract@var{m}} instruction pattern
3363
@item @samp{vec_extract@var{m}}
3364
Extract given field from the vector value.  Operand 1 is the vector, operand 2
3365
specify field index and operand 0 place to store value into.
3366
 
3367
@cindex @code{vec_init@var{m}} instruction pattern
3368
@item @samp{vec_init@var{m}}
3369
Initialize the vector to given values.  Operand 0 is the vector to initialize
3370
and operand 1 is parallel containing values for individual fields.
3371
 
3372
@cindex @code{push@var{m}1} instruction pattern
3373
@item @samp{push@var{m}1}
3374
Output a push instruction.  Operand 0 is value to push.  Used only when
3375
@code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined.  For historical reason, this pattern may be
3376
missing and in such case an @code{mov} expander is used instead, with a
3377
@code{MEM} expression forming the push operation.  The @code{mov} expander
3378
method is deprecated.
3379
 
3380
@cindex @code{add@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3381
@item @samp{add@var{m}3}
3382
Add operand 2 and operand 1, storing the result in operand 0.  All operands
3383
must have mode @var{m}.  This can be used even on two-address machines, by
3384
means of constraints requiring operands 1 and 0 to be the same location.
3385
 
3386
@cindex @code{sub@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3387
@cindex @code{mul@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3388
@cindex @code{div@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3389
@cindex @code{udiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3390
@cindex @code{mod@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3391
@cindex @code{umod@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3392
@cindex @code{umin@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3393
@cindex @code{umax@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3394
@cindex @code{and@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3395
@cindex @code{ior@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3396
@cindex @code{xor@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3397
@item @samp{sub@var{m}3}, @samp{mul@var{m}3}
3398
@itemx @samp{div@var{m}3}, @samp{udiv@var{m}3}
3399
@itemx @samp{mod@var{m}3}, @samp{umod@var{m}3}
3400
@itemx @samp{umin@var{m}3}, @samp{umax@var{m}3}
3401
@itemx @samp{and@var{m}3}, @samp{ior@var{m}3}, @samp{xor@var{m}3}
3402
Similar, for other arithmetic operations.
3403
 
3404
@cindex @code{min@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3405
@cindex @code{max@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3406
@item @samp{smin@var{m}3}, @samp{smax@var{m}3}
3407
Signed minimum and maximum operations.  When used with floating point,
3408
if both operands are zeros, or if either operand is @code{NaN}, then
3409
it is unspecified which of the two operands is returned as the result.
3410
 
3411
@cindex @code{reduc_smin_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3412
@cindex @code{reduc_smax_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3413
@item @samp{reduc_smin_@var{m}}, @samp{reduc_smax_@var{m}}
3414
Find the signed minimum/maximum of the elements of a vector. The vector is
3415
operand 1, and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of
3416
operand 0 (also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same
3417
modes.
3418
 
3419
@cindex @code{reduc_umin_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3420
@cindex @code{reduc_umax_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3421
@item @samp{reduc_umin_@var{m}}, @samp{reduc_umax_@var{m}}
3422
Find the unsigned minimum/maximum of the elements of a vector. The vector is
3423
operand 1, and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of
3424
operand 0 (also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same
3425
modes.
3426
 
3427
@cindex @code{reduc_splus_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3428
@item @samp{reduc_splus_@var{m}}
3429
Compute the sum of the signed elements of a vector. The vector is operand 1,
3430
and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of operand 0
3431
(also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same modes.
3432
 
3433
@cindex @code{reduc_uplus_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3434
@item @samp{reduc_uplus_@var{m}}
3435
Compute the sum of the unsigned elements of a vector. The vector is operand 1,
3436
and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of operand 0
3437
(also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same modes.
3438
 
3439
@cindex @code{sdot_prod@var{m}} instruction pattern
3440
@item @samp{sdot_prod@var{m}}
3441
@cindex @code{udot_prod@var{m}} instruction pattern
3442
@item @samp{udot_prod@var{m}}
3443
Compute the sum of the products of two signed/unsigned elements.
3444
Operand 1 and operand 2 are of the same mode. Their product, which is of a
3445
wider mode, is computed and added to operand 3. Operand 3 is of a mode equal or
3446
wider than the mode of the product. The result is placed in operand 0, which
3447
is of the same mode as operand 3.
3448
 
3449
@cindex @code{ssum_widen@var{m3}} instruction pattern
3450
@item @samp{ssum_widen@var{m3}}
3451
@cindex @code{usum_widen@var{m3}} instruction pattern
3452
@item @samp{usum_widen@var{m3}}
3453
Operands 0 and 2 are of the same mode, which is wider than the mode of
3454
operand 1. Add operand 1 to operand 2 and place the widened result in
3455
operand 0. (This is used express accumulation of elements into an accumulator
3456
of a wider mode.)
3457
 
3458
@cindex @code{vec_shl_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3459
@cindex @code{vec_shr_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3460
@item @samp{vec_shl_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_shr_@var{m}}
3461
Whole vector left/right shift in bits.
3462
Operand 1 is a vector to be shifted.
3463
Operand 2 is an integer shift amount in bits.
3464
Operand 0 is where the resulting shifted vector is stored.
3465
The output and input vectors should have the same modes.
3466
 
3467
@cindex @code{mulhisi3} instruction pattern
3468
@item @samp{mulhisi3}
3469
Multiply operands 1 and 2, which have mode @code{HImode}, and store
3470
a @code{SImode} product in operand 0.
3471
 
3472
@cindex @code{mulqihi3} instruction pattern
3473
@cindex @code{mulsidi3} instruction pattern
3474
@item @samp{mulqihi3}, @samp{mulsidi3}
3475
Similar widening-multiplication instructions of other widths.
3476
 
3477
@cindex @code{umulqihi3} instruction pattern
3478
@cindex @code{umulhisi3} instruction pattern
3479
@cindex @code{umulsidi3} instruction pattern
3480
@item @samp{umulqihi3}, @samp{umulhisi3}, @samp{umulsidi3}
3481
Similar widening-multiplication instructions that do unsigned
3482
multiplication.
3483
 
3484
@cindex @code{usmulqihi3} instruction pattern
3485
@cindex @code{usmulhisi3} instruction pattern
3486
@cindex @code{usmulsidi3} instruction pattern
3487
@item @samp{usmulqihi3}, @samp{usmulhisi3}, @samp{usmulsidi3}
3488
Similar widening-multiplication instructions that interpret the first
3489
operand as unsigned and the second operand as signed, then do a signed
3490
multiplication.
3491
 
3492
@cindex @code{smul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern
3493
@item @samp{smul@var{m}3_highpart}
3494
Perform a signed multiplication of operands 1 and 2, which have mode
3495
@var{m}, and store the most significant half of the product in operand 0.
3496
The least significant half of the product is discarded.
3497
 
3498
@cindex @code{umul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern
3499
@item @samp{umul@var{m}3_highpart}
3500
Similar, but the multiplication is unsigned.
3501
 
3502
@cindex @code{divmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern
3503
@item @samp{divmod@var{m}4}
3504
Signed division that produces both a quotient and a remainder.
3505
Operand 1 is divided by operand 2 to produce a quotient stored
3506
in operand 0 and a remainder stored in operand 3.
3507
 
3508
For machines with an instruction that produces both a quotient and a
3509
remainder, provide a pattern for @samp{divmod@var{m}4} but do not
3510
provide patterns for @samp{div@var{m}3} and @samp{mod@var{m}3}.  This
3511
allows optimization in the relatively common case when both the quotient
3512
and remainder are computed.
3513
 
3514
If an instruction that just produces a quotient or just a remainder
3515
exists and is more efficient than the instruction that produces both,
3516
write the output routine of @samp{divmod@var{m}4} to call
3517
@code{find_reg_note} and look for a @code{REG_UNUSED} note on the
3518
quotient or remainder and generate the appropriate instruction.
3519
 
3520
@cindex @code{udivmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern
3521
@item @samp{udivmod@var{m}4}
3522
Similar, but does unsigned division.
3523
 
3524
@anchor{shift patterns}
3525
@cindex @code{ashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3526
@item @samp{ashl@var{m}3}
3527
Arithmetic-shift operand 1 left by a number of bits specified by operand
3528
2, and store the result in operand 0.  Here @var{m} is the mode of
3529
operand 0 and operand 1; operand 2's mode is specified by the
3530
instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that
3531
mode before generating the instruction.  The meaning of out-of-range shift
3532
counts can optionally be specified by @code{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}.
3533
@xref{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}.
3534
 
3535
@cindex @code{ashr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3536
@cindex @code{lshr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3537
@cindex @code{rotl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3538
@cindex @code{rotr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3539
@item @samp{ashr@var{m}3}, @samp{lshr@var{m}3}, @samp{rotl@var{m}3}, @samp{rotr@var{m}3}
3540
Other shift and rotate instructions, analogous to the
3541
@code{ashl@var{m}3} instructions.
3542
 
3543
@cindex @code{neg@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3544
@item @samp{neg@var{m}2}
3545
Negate operand 1 and store the result in operand 0.
3546
 
3547
@cindex @code{abs@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3548
@item @samp{abs@var{m}2}
3549
Store the absolute value of operand 1 into operand 0.
3550
 
3551
@cindex @code{sqrt@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3552
@item @samp{sqrt@var{m}2}
3553
Store the square root of operand 1 into operand 0.
3554
 
3555
The @code{sqrt} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3556
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sqrtf}
3557
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3558
type @code{float}.
3559
 
3560
@cindex @code{cos@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3561
@item @samp{cos@var{m}2}
3562
Store the cosine of operand 1 into operand 0.
3563
 
3564
The @code{cos} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3565
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{cosf}
3566
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3567
type @code{float}.
3568
 
3569
@cindex @code{sin@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3570
@item @samp{sin@var{m}2}
3571
Store the sine of operand 1 into operand 0.
3572
 
3573
The @code{sin} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3574
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sinf}
3575
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3576
type @code{float}.
3577
 
3578
@cindex @code{exp@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3579
@item @samp{exp@var{m}2}
3580
Store the exponential of operand 1 into operand 0.
3581
 
3582
The @code{exp} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3583
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{expf}
3584
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3585
type @code{float}.
3586
 
3587
@cindex @code{log@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3588
@item @samp{log@var{m}2}
3589
Store the natural logarithm of operand 1 into operand 0.
3590
 
3591
The @code{log} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3592
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{logf}
3593
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3594
type @code{float}.
3595
 
3596
@cindex @code{pow@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3597
@item @samp{pow@var{m}3}
3598
Store the value of operand 1 raised to the exponent operand 2
3599
into operand 0.
3600
 
3601
The @code{pow} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3602
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{powf}
3603
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3604
type @code{float}.
3605
 
3606
@cindex @code{atan2@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3607
@item @samp{atan2@var{m}3}
3608
Store the arc tangent (inverse tangent) of operand 1 divided by
3609
operand 2 into operand 0, using the signs of both arguments to
3610
determine the quadrant of the result.
3611
 
3612
The @code{atan2} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3613
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{atan2f}
3614
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3615
type @code{float}.
3616
 
3617
@cindex @code{floor@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3618
@item @samp{floor@var{m}2}
3619
Store the largest integral value not greater than argument.
3620
 
3621
The @code{floor} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3622
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{floorf}
3623
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3624
type @code{float}.
3625
 
3626
@cindex @code{btrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3627
@item @samp{btrunc@var{m}2}
3628
Store the argument rounded to integer towards zero.
3629
 
3630
The @code{trunc} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3631
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{truncf}
3632
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3633
type @code{float}.
3634
 
3635
@cindex @code{round@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3636
@item @samp{round@var{m}2}
3637
Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero.
3638
 
3639
The @code{round} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3640
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{roundf}
3641
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3642
type @code{float}.
3643
 
3644
@cindex @code{ceil@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3645
@item @samp{ceil@var{m}2}
3646
Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero.
3647
 
3648
The @code{ceil} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3649
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{ceilf}
3650
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3651
type @code{float}.
3652
 
3653
@cindex @code{nearbyint@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3654
@item @samp{nearbyint@var{m}2}
3655
Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode
3656
 
3657
The @code{nearbyint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3658
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{nearbyintf}
3659
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3660
type @code{float}.
3661
 
3662
@cindex @code{rint@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3663
@item @samp{rint@var{m}2}
3664
Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode and
3665
raise the inexact exception when the result differs in value from
3666
the argument
3667
 
3668
The @code{rint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3669
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{rintf}
3670
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3671
type @code{float}.
3672
 
3673
@cindex @code{copysign@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3674
@item @samp{copysign@var{m}3}
3675
Store a value with the magnitude of operand 1 and the sign of operand
3676
2 into operand 0.
3677
 
3678
The @code{copysign} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3679
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{copysignf}
3680
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3681
type @code{float}.
3682
 
3683
@cindex @code{ffs@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3684
@item @samp{ffs@var{m}2}
3685
Store into operand 0 one plus the index of the least significant 1-bit
3686
of operand 1.  If operand 1 is zero, store zero.  @var{m} is the mode
3687
of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction
3688
pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before
3689
generating the instruction.
3690
 
3691
The @code{ffs} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3692
corresponds to the C data type @code{int}.
3693
 
3694
@cindex @code{clz@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3695
@item @samp{clz@var{m}2}
3696
Store into operand 0 the number of leading 0-bits in @var{x}, starting
3697
at the most significant bit position.  If @var{x} is 0, the result is
3698
undefined.  @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is
3699
specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the
3700
operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
3701
 
3702
@cindex @code{ctz@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3703
@item @samp{ctz@var{m}2}
3704
Store into operand 0 the number of trailing 0-bits in @var{x}, starting
3705
at the least significant bit position.  If @var{x} is 0, the result is
3706
undefined.  @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is
3707
specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the
3708
operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
3709
 
3710
@cindex @code{popcount@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3711
@item @samp{popcount@var{m}2}
3712
Store into operand 0 the number of 1-bits in @var{x}.  @var{m} is the
3713
mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction
3714
pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before
3715
generating the instruction.
3716
 
3717
@cindex @code{parity@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3718
@item @samp{parity@var{m}2}
3719
Store into operand 0 the parity of @var{x}, i.e.@: the number of 1-bits
3720
in @var{x} modulo 2.  @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode
3721
is specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert
3722
the operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
3723
 
3724
@cindex @code{one_cmpl@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3725
@item @samp{one_cmpl@var{m}2}
3726
Store the bitwise-complement of operand 1 into operand 0.
3727
 
3728
@cindex @code{cmp@var{m}} instruction pattern
3729
@item @samp{cmp@var{m}}
3730
Compare operand 0 and operand 1, and set the condition codes.
3731
The RTL pattern should look like this:
3732
 
3733
@smallexample
3734
(set (cc0) (compare (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})
3735
                    (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{})))
3736
@end smallexample
3737
 
3738
@cindex @code{tst@var{m}} instruction pattern
3739
@item @samp{tst@var{m}}
3740
Compare operand 0 against zero, and set the condition codes.
3741
The RTL pattern should look like this:
3742
 
3743
@smallexample
3744
(set (cc0) (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{}))
3745
@end smallexample
3746
 
3747
@samp{tst@var{m}} patterns should not be defined for machines that do
3748
not use @code{(cc0)}.  Doing so would confuse the optimizer since it
3749
would no longer be clear which @code{set} operations were comparisons.
3750
The @samp{cmp@var{m}} patterns should be used instead.
3751
 
3752
@cindex @code{movmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
3753
@item @samp{movmem@var{m}}
3754
Block move instruction.  The destination and source blocks of memory
3755
are the first two operands, and both are @code{mem:BLK}s with an
3756
address in mode @code{Pmode}.
3757
 
3758
The number of bytes to move is the third operand, in mode @var{m}.
3759
Usually, you specify @code{word_mode} for @var{m}.  However, if you can
3760
generate better code knowing the range of valid lengths is smaller than
3761
those representable in a full word, you should provide a pattern with a
3762
mode corresponding to the range of values you can handle efficiently
3763
(e.g., @code{QImode} for values in the range 0--127; note we avoid numbers
3764
that appear negative) and also a pattern with @code{word_mode}.
3765
 
3766
The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and
3767
destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the
3768
compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned,
3769
it may provide the value 4 for this operand.
3770
 
3771
Descriptions of multiple @code{movmem@var{m}} patterns can only be
3772
beneficial if the patterns for smaller modes have fewer restrictions
3773
on their first, second and fourth operands.  Note that the mode @var{m}
3774
in @code{movmem@var{m}} does not impose any restriction on the mode of
3775
individually moved data units in the block.
3776
 
3777
These patterns need not give special consideration to the possibility
3778
that the source and destination strings might overlap.
3779
 
3780
@cindex @code{movstr} instruction pattern
3781
@item @samp{movstr}
3782
String copy instruction, with @code{stpcpy} semantics.  Operand 0 is
3783
an output operand in mode @code{Pmode}.  The addresses of the
3784
destination and source strings are operands 1 and 2, and both are
3785
@code{mem:BLK}s with addresses in mode @code{Pmode}.  The execution of
3786
the expansion of this pattern should store in operand 0 the address in
3787
which the @code{NUL} terminator was stored in the destination string.
3788
 
3789
@cindex @code{setmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
3790
@item @samp{setmem@var{m}}
3791
Block set instruction.  The destination string is the first operand,
3792
given as a @code{mem:BLK} whose address is in mode @code{Pmode}.  The
3793
number of bytes to set is the second operand, in mode @var{m}.  The value to
3794
initialize the memory with is the third operand. Targets that only support the
3795
clearing of memory should reject any value that is not the constant 0.  See
3796
@samp{movmem@var{m}} for a discussion of the choice of mode.
3797
 
3798
The fourth operand is the known alignment of the destination, in the form
3799
of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the compiler knows that the
3800
destination is word-aligned, it may provide the value 4 for this
3801
operand.
3802
 
3803
The use for multiple @code{setmem@var{m}} is as for @code{movmem@var{m}}.
3804
 
3805
@cindex @code{cmpstrn@var{m}} instruction pattern
3806
@item @samp{cmpstrn@var{m}}
3807
String compare instruction, with five operands.  Operand 0 is the output;
3808
it has mode @var{m}.  The remaining four operands are like the operands
3809
of @samp{movmem@var{m}}.  The two memory blocks specified are compared
3810
byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each
3811
string.  The instruction is not allowed to prefetch more than one byte
3812
at a time since either string may end in the first byte and reading past
3813
that may access an invalid page or segment and cause a fault.  The
3814
effect of the instruction is to store a value in operand 0 whose sign
3815
indicates the result of the comparison.
3816
 
3817
@cindex @code{cmpstr@var{m}} instruction pattern
3818
@item @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}
3819
String compare instruction, without known maximum length.  Operand 0 is the
3820
output; it has mode @var{m}.  The second and third operand are the blocks of
3821
memory to be compared; both are @code{mem:BLK} with an address in mode
3822
@code{Pmode}.
3823
 
3824
The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and
3825
destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the
3826
compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned,
3827
it may provide the value 4 for this operand.
3828
 
3829
The two memory blocks specified are compared byte by byte in lexicographic
3830
order starting at the beginning of each string.  The instruction is not allowed
3831
to prefetch more than one byte at a time since either string may end in the
3832
first byte and reading past that may access an invalid page or segment and
3833
cause a fault.  The effect of the instruction is to store a value in operand 0
3834
whose sign indicates the result of the comparison.
3835
 
3836
@cindex @code{cmpmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
3837
@item @samp{cmpmem@var{m}}
3838
Block compare instruction, with five operands like the operands
3839
of @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}.  The two memory blocks specified are compared
3840
byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each
3841
block.  Unlike @samp{cmpstr@var{m}} the instruction can prefetch
3842
any bytes in the two memory blocks.  The effect of the instruction is
3843
to store a value in operand 0 whose sign indicates the result of the
3844
comparison.
3845
 
3846
@cindex @code{strlen@var{m}} instruction pattern
3847
@item @samp{strlen@var{m}}
3848
Compute the length of a string, with three operands.
3849
Operand 0 is the result (of mode @var{m}), operand 1 is
3850
a @code{mem} referring to the first character of the string,
3851
operand 2 is the character to search for (normally zero),
3852
and operand 3 is a constant describing the known alignment
3853
of the beginning of the string.
3854
 
3855
@cindex @code{float@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3856
@item @samp{float@var{m}@var{n}2}
3857
Convert signed integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m}) to
3858
floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode
3859
@var{n}).
3860
 
3861
@cindex @code{floatuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3862
@item @samp{floatuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
3863
Convert unsigned integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m})
3864
to floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode
3865
@var{n}).
3866
 
3867
@cindex @code{fix@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3868
@item @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2}
3869
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
3870
point mode @var{n} as a signed number and store in operand 0 (which
3871
has mode @var{n}).  This instruction's result is defined only when
3872
the value of operand 1 is an integer.
3873
 
3874
If the machine description defines this pattern, it also needs to
3875
define the @code{ftrunc} pattern.
3876
 
3877
@cindex @code{fixuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3878
@item @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
3879
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
3880
point mode @var{n} as an unsigned number and store in operand 0 (which
3881
has mode @var{n}).  This instruction's result is defined only when the
3882
value of operand 1 is an integer.
3883
 
3884
@cindex @code{ftrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3885
@item @samp{ftrunc@var{m}2}
3886
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to an
3887
integer value, still represented in floating point mode @var{m}, and
3888
store it in operand 0 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}).
3889
 
3890
@cindex @code{fix_trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3891
@item @samp{fix_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
3892
Like @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point value
3893
of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer.
3894
 
3895
@cindex @code{fixuns_trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3896
@item @samp{fixuns_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
3897
Like @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point
3898
value of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer.
3899
 
3900
@cindex @code{trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3901
@item @samp{trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
3902
Truncate operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
3903
store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
3904
point or both floating point.
3905
 
3906
@cindex @code{extend@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3907
@item @samp{extend@var{m}@var{n}2}
3908
Sign-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
3909
store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
3910
point or both floating point.
3911
 
3912
@cindex @code{zero_extend@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3913
@item @samp{zero_extend@var{m}@var{n}2}
3914
Zero-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
3915
store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
3916
point.
3917
 
3918
@cindex @code{extv} instruction pattern
3919
@item @samp{extv}
3920
Extract a bit-field from operand 1 (a register or memory operand), where
3921
operand 2 specifies the width in bits and operand 3 the starting bit,
3922
and store it in operand 0.  Operand 0 must have mode @code{word_mode}.
3923
Operand 1 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or @code{word_mode}; often
3924
@code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers.  Operands 2 and 3 must
3925
be valid for @code{word_mode}.
3926
 
3927
The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants
3928
for operands 2 and 3 and the constant is never zero for operand 2.
3929
 
3930
The bit-field value is sign-extended to a full word integer
3931
before it is stored in operand 0.
3932
 
3933
@cindex @code{extzv} instruction pattern
3934
@item @samp{extzv}
3935
Like @samp{extv} except that the bit-field value is zero-extended.
3936
 
3937
@cindex @code{insv} instruction pattern
3938
@item @samp{insv}
3939
Store operand 3 (which must be valid for @code{word_mode}) into a
3940
bit-field in operand 0, where operand 1 specifies the width in bits and
3941
operand 2 the starting bit.  Operand 0 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or
3942
@code{word_mode}; often @code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers.
3943
Operands 1 and 2 must be valid for @code{word_mode}.
3944
 
3945
The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants
3946
for operands 1 and 2 and the constant is never zero for operand 1.
3947
 
3948
@cindex @code{mov@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern
3949
@item @samp{mov@var{mode}cc}
3950
Conditionally move operand 2 or operand 3 into operand 0 according to the
3951
comparison in operand 1.  If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved
3952
into operand 0, otherwise operand 3 is moved.
3953
 
3954
The mode of the operands being compared need not be the same as the operands
3955
being moved.  Some machines, sparc64 for example, have instructions that
3956
conditionally move an integer value based on the floating point condition
3957
codes and vice versa.
3958
 
3959
If the machine does not have conditional move instructions, do not
3960
define these patterns.
3961
 
3962
@cindex @code{add@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern
3963
@item @samp{add@var{mode}cc}
3964
Similar to @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} but for conditional addition.  Conditionally
3965
move operand 2 or (operands 2 + operand 3) into operand 0 according to the
3966
comparison in operand 1.  If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved into
3967
operand 0, otherwise (operand 2 + operand 3) is moved.
3968
 
3969
@cindex @code{s@var{cond}} instruction pattern
3970
@item @samp{s@var{cond}}
3971
Store zero or nonzero in the operand according to the condition codes.
3972
Value stored is nonzero iff the condition @var{cond} is true.
3973
@var{cond} is the name of a comparison operation expression code, such
3974
as @code{eq}, @code{lt} or @code{leu}.
3975
 
3976
You specify the mode that the operand must have when you write the
3977
@code{match_operand} expression.  The compiler automatically sees
3978
which mode you have used and supplies an operand of that mode.
3979
 
3980
The value stored for a true condition must have 1 as its low bit, or
3981
else must be negative.  Otherwise the instruction is not suitable and
3982
you should omit it from the machine description.  You describe to the
3983
compiler exactly which value is stored by defining the macro
3984
@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} (@pxref{Misc}).  If a description cannot be
3985
found that can be used for all the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns, you
3986
should omit those operations from the machine description.
3987
 
3988
These operations may fail, but should do so only in relatively
3989
uncommon cases; if they would fail for common cases involving
3990
integer comparisons, it is best to omit these patterns.
3991
 
3992
If these operations are omitted, the compiler will usually generate code
3993
that copies the constant one to the target and branches around an
3994
assignment of zero to the target.  If this code is more efficient than
3995
the potential instructions used for the @samp{s@var{cond}} pattern
3996
followed by those required to convert the result into a 1 or a zero in
3997
@code{SImode}, you should omit the @samp{s@var{cond}} operations from
3998
the machine description.
3999
 
4000
@cindex @code{b@var{cond}} instruction pattern
4001
@item @samp{b@var{cond}}
4002
Conditional branch instruction.  Operand 0 is a @code{label_ref} that
4003
refers to the label to jump to.  Jump if the condition codes meet
4004
condition @var{cond}.
4005
 
4006
Some machines do not follow the model assumed here where a comparison
4007
instruction is followed by a conditional branch instruction.  In that
4008
case, the @samp{cmp@var{m}} (and @samp{tst@var{m}}) patterns should
4009
simply store the operands away and generate all the required insns in a
4010
@code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) for the conditional
4011
branch operations.  All calls to expand @samp{b@var{cond}} patterns are
4012
immediately preceded by calls to expand either a @samp{cmp@var{m}}
4013
pattern or a @samp{tst@var{m}} pattern.
4014
 
4015
Machines that use a pseudo register for the condition code value, or
4016
where the mode used for the comparison depends on the condition being
4017
tested, should also use the above mechanism.  @xref{Jump Patterns}.
4018
 
4019
The above discussion also applies to the @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} and
4020
@samp{s@var{cond}} patterns.
4021
 
4022
@cindex @code{cbranch@var{mode}4} instruction pattern
4023
@item @samp{cbranch@var{mode}4}
4024
Conditional branch instruction combined with a compare instruction.
4025
Operand 0 is a comparison operator.  Operand 1 and operand 2 are the
4026
first and second operands of the comparison, respectively.  Operand 3
4027
is a @code{label_ref} that refers to the label to jump to.
4028
 
4029
@cindex @code{jump} instruction pattern
4030
@item @samp{jump}
4031
A jump inside a function; an unconditional branch.  Operand 0 is the
4032
@code{label_ref} of the label to jump to.  This pattern name is mandatory
4033
on all machines.
4034
 
4035
@cindex @code{call} instruction pattern
4036
@item @samp{call}
4037
Subroutine call instruction returning no value.  Operand 0 is the
4038
function to call; operand 1 is the number of bytes of arguments pushed
4039
as a @code{const_int}; operand 2 is the number of registers used as
4040
operands.
4041
 
4042
On most machines, operand 2 is not actually stored into the RTL
4043
pattern.  It is supplied for the sake of some RISC machines which need
4044
to put this information into the assembler code; they can put it in
4045
the RTL instead of operand 1.
4046
 
4047
Operand 0 should be a @code{mem} RTX whose address is the address of the
4048
function.  Note, however, that this address can be a @code{symbol_ref}
4049
expression even if it would not be a legitimate memory address on the
4050
target machine.  If it is also not a valid argument for a call
4051
instruction, the pattern for this operation should be a
4052
@code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) that places the
4053
address into a register and uses that register in the call instruction.
4054
 
4055
@cindex @code{call_value} instruction pattern
4056
@item @samp{call_value}
4057
Subroutine call instruction returning a value.  Operand 0 is the hard
4058
register in which the value is returned.  There are three more
4059
operands, the same as the three operands of the @samp{call}
4060
instruction (but with numbers increased by one).
4061
 
4062
Subroutines that return @code{BLKmode} objects use the @samp{call}
4063
insn.
4064
 
4065
@cindex @code{call_pop} instruction pattern
4066
@cindex @code{call_value_pop} instruction pattern
4067
@item @samp{call_pop}, @samp{call_value_pop}
4068
Similar to @samp{call} and @samp{call_value}, except used if defined and
4069
if @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is nonzero.  They should emit a @code{parallel}
4070
that contains both the function call and a @code{set} to indicate the
4071
adjustment made to the frame pointer.
4072
 
4073
For machines where @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} can be nonzero, the use of these
4074
patterns increases the number of functions for which the frame pointer
4075
can be eliminated, if desired.
4076
 
4077
@cindex @code{untyped_call} instruction pattern
4078
@item @samp{untyped_call}
4079
Subroutine call instruction returning a value of any type.  Operand 0 is
4080
the function to call; operand 1 is a memory location where the result of
4081
calling the function is to be stored; operand 2 is a @code{parallel}
4082
expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates
4083
the saving of a function return value into the result block.
4084
 
4085
This instruction pattern should be defined to support
4086
@code{__builtin_apply} on machines where special instructions are needed
4087
to call a subroutine with arbitrary arguments or to save the value
4088
returned.  This instruction pattern is required on machines that have
4089
multiple registers that can hold a return value
4090
(i.e.@: @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} is true for more than one register).
4091
 
4092
@cindex @code{return} instruction pattern
4093
@item @samp{return}
4094
Subroutine return instruction.  This instruction pattern name should be
4095
defined only if a single instruction can do all the work of returning
4096
from a function.
4097
 
4098
Like the @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, this pattern is also used after the
4099
RTL generation phase.  In this case it is to support machines where
4100
multiple instructions are usually needed to return from a function, but
4101
some class of functions only requires one instruction to implement a
4102
return.  Normally, the applicable functions are those which do not need
4103
to save any registers or allocate stack space.
4104
 
4105
@findex reload_completed
4106
@findex leaf_function_p
4107
For such machines, the condition specified in this pattern should only
4108
be true when @code{reload_completed} is nonzero and the function's
4109
epilogue would only be a single instruction.  For machines with register
4110
windows, the routine @code{leaf_function_p} may be used to determine if
4111
a register window push is required.
4112
 
4113
Machines that have conditional return instructions should define patterns
4114
such as
4115
 
4116
@smallexample
4117
(define_insn ""
4118
  [(set (pc)
4119
        (if_then_else (match_operator
4120
 
4121
                         [(cc0) (const_int 0)])
4122
                      (return)
4123
                      (pc)))]
4124
  "@var{condition}"
4125
  "@dots{}")
4126
@end smallexample
4127
 
4128
where @var{condition} would normally be the same condition specified on the
4129
named @samp{return} pattern.
4130
 
4131
@cindex @code{untyped_return} instruction pattern
4132
@item @samp{untyped_return}
4133
Untyped subroutine return instruction.  This instruction pattern should
4134
be defined to support @code{__builtin_return} on machines where special
4135
instructions are needed to return a value of any type.
4136
 
4137
Operand 0 is a memory location where the result of calling a function
4138
with @code{__builtin_apply} is stored; operand 1 is a @code{parallel}
4139
expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates
4140
the restoring of a function return value from the result block.
4141
 
4142
@cindex @code{nop} instruction pattern
4143
@item @samp{nop}
4144
No-op instruction.  This instruction pattern name should always be defined
4145
to output a no-op in assembler code.  @code{(const_int 0)} will do as an
4146
RTL pattern.
4147
 
4148
@cindex @code{indirect_jump} instruction pattern
4149
@item @samp{indirect_jump}
4150
An instruction to jump to an address which is operand zero.
4151
This pattern name is mandatory on all machines.
4152
 
4153
@cindex @code{casesi} instruction pattern
4154
@item @samp{casesi}
4155
Instruction to jump through a dispatch table, including bounds checking.
4156
This instruction takes five operands:
4157
 
4158
@enumerate
4159
@item
4160
The index to dispatch on, which has mode @code{SImode}.
4161
 
4162
@item
4163
The lower bound for indices in the table, an integer constant.
4164
 
4165
@item
4166
The total range of indices in the table---the largest index
4167
minus the smallest one (both inclusive).
4168
 
4169
@item
4170
A label that precedes the table itself.
4171
 
4172
@item
4173
A label to jump to if the index has a value outside the bounds.
4174
@end enumerate
4175
 
4176
The table is a @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec} inside of a
4177
@code{jump_insn}.  The number of elements in the table is one plus the
4178
difference between the upper bound and the lower bound.
4179
 
4180
@cindex @code{tablejump} instruction pattern
4181
@item @samp{tablejump}
4182
Instruction to jump to a variable address.  This is a low-level
4183
capability which can be used to implement a dispatch table when there
4184
is no @samp{casesi} pattern.
4185
 
4186
This pattern requires two operands: the address or offset, and a label
4187
which should immediately precede the jump table.  If the macro
4188
@code{CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE} evaluates to a nonzero value then the first
4189
operand is an offset which counts from the address of the table; otherwise,
4190
it is an absolute address to jump to.  In either case, the first operand has
4191
mode @code{Pmode}.
4192
 
4193
The @samp{tablejump} insn is always the last insn before the jump
4194
table it uses.  Its assembler code normally has no need to use the
4195
second operand, but you should incorporate it in the RTL pattern so
4196
that the jump optimizer will not delete the table as unreachable code.
4197
 
4198
 
4199
@cindex @code{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} instruction pattern
4200
@item @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}
4201
Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and
4202
jumps if the register is nonzero.  Operand 0 is the register to
4203
decrement and test; operand 1 is the label to jump to if the
4204
register is nonzero.  @xref{Looping Patterns}.
4205
 
4206
This optional instruction pattern is only used by the combiner,
4207
typically for loops reversed by the loop optimizer when strength
4208
reduction is enabled.
4209
 
4210
@cindex @code{doloop_end} instruction pattern
4211
@item @samp{doloop_end}
4212
Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and jumps if
4213
the register is nonzero.  This instruction takes five operands: Operand
4214
 
4215
iterations as a @code{const_int} or @code{const0_rtx} if this cannot be
4216
determined until run-time; operand 2 is the actual or estimated maximum
4217
number of iterations as a @code{const_int}; operand 3 is the number of
4218
enclosed loops as a @code{const_int} (an innermost loop has a value of
4219
1); operand 4 is the label to jump to if the register is nonzero.
4220
@xref{Looping Patterns}.
4221
 
4222
This optional instruction pattern should be defined for machines with
4223
low-overhead looping instructions as the loop optimizer will try to
4224
modify suitable loops to utilize it.  If nested low-overhead looping is
4225
not supported, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
4226
and make the pattern fail if operand 3 is not @code{const1_rtx}.
4227
Similarly, if the actual or estimated maximum number of iterations is
4228
too large for this instruction, make it fail.
4229
 
4230
@cindex @code{doloop_begin} instruction pattern
4231
@item @samp{doloop_begin}
4232
Companion instruction to @code{doloop_end} required for machines that
4233
need to perform some initialization, such as loading special registers
4234
used by a low-overhead looping instruction.  If initialization insns do
4235
not always need to be emitted, use a @code{define_expand}
4236
(@pxref{Expander Definitions}) and make it fail.
4237
 
4238
 
4239
@cindex @code{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare} instruction pattern
4240
@item @samp{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare}
4241
Canonicalize the function pointer in operand 1 and store the result
4242
into operand 0.
4243
 
4244
Operand 0 is always a @code{reg} and has mode @code{Pmode}; operand 1
4245
may be a @code{reg}, @code{mem}, @code{symbol_ref}, @code{const_int}, etc
4246
and also has mode @code{Pmode}.
4247
 
4248
Canonicalization of a function pointer usually involves computing
4249
the address of the function which would be called if the function
4250
pointer were used in an indirect call.
4251
 
4252
Only define this pattern if function pointers on the target machine
4253
can have different values but still call the same function when
4254
used in an indirect call.
4255
 
4256
@cindex @code{save_stack_block} instruction pattern
4257
@cindex @code{save_stack_function} instruction pattern
4258
@cindex @code{save_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern
4259
@cindex @code{restore_stack_block} instruction pattern
4260
@cindex @code{restore_stack_function} instruction pattern
4261
@cindex @code{restore_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern
4262
@item @samp{save_stack_block}
4263
@itemx @samp{save_stack_function}
4264
@itemx @samp{save_stack_nonlocal}
4265
@itemx @samp{restore_stack_block}
4266
@itemx @samp{restore_stack_function}
4267
@itemx @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal}
4268
Most machines save and restore the stack pointer by copying it to or
4269
from an object of mode @code{Pmode}.  Do not define these patterns on
4270
such machines.
4271
 
4272
Some machines require special handling for stack pointer saves and
4273
restores.  On those machines, define the patterns corresponding to the
4274
non-standard cases by using a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander
4275
Definitions}) that produces the required insns.  The three types of
4276
saves and restores are:
4277
 
4278
@enumerate
4279
@item
4280
@samp{save_stack_block} saves the stack pointer at the start of a block
4281
that allocates a variable-sized object, and @samp{restore_stack_block}
4282
restores the stack pointer when the block is exited.
4283
 
4284
@item
4285
@samp{save_stack_function} and @samp{restore_stack_function} do a
4286
similar job for the outermost block of a function and are used when the
4287
function allocates variable-sized objects or calls @code{alloca}.  Only
4288
the epilogue uses the restored stack pointer, allowing a simpler save or
4289
restore sequence on some machines.
4290
 
4291
@item
4292
@samp{save_stack_nonlocal} is used in functions that contain labels
4293
branched to by nested functions.  It saves the stack pointer in such a
4294
way that the inner function can use @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} to
4295
restore the stack pointer.  The compiler generates code to restore the
4296
frame and argument pointer registers, but some machines require saving
4297
and restoring additional data such as register window information or
4298
stack backchains.  Place insns in these patterns to save and restore any
4299
such required data.
4300
@end enumerate
4301
 
4302
When saving the stack pointer, operand 0 is the save area and operand 1
4303
is the stack pointer.  The mode used to allocate the save area defaults
4304
to @code{Pmode} but you can override that choice by defining the
4305
@code{STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE} macro (@pxref{Storage Layout}).  You must
4306
specify an integral mode, or @code{VOIDmode} if no save area is needed
4307
for a particular type of save (either because no save is needed or
4308
because a machine-specific save area can be used).  Operand 0 is the
4309
stack pointer and operand 1 is the save area for restore operations.  If
4310
@samp{save_stack_block} is defined, operand 0 must not be
4311
@code{VOIDmode} since these saves can be arbitrarily nested.
4312
 
4313
A save area is a @code{mem} that is at a constant offset from
4314
@code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx} when the stack pointer is saved for use by
4315
nonlocal gotos and a @code{reg} in the other two cases.
4316
 
4317
@cindex @code{allocate_stack} instruction pattern
4318
@item @samp{allocate_stack}
4319
Subtract (or add if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is undefined) operand 1 from
4320
the stack pointer to create space for dynamically allocated data.
4321
 
4322
Store the resultant pointer to this space into operand 0.  If you
4323
are allocating space from the main stack, do this by emitting a
4324
move insn to copy @code{virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx} to operand 0.
4325
If you are allocating the space elsewhere, generate code to copy the
4326
location of the space to operand 0.  In the latter case, you must
4327
ensure this space gets freed when the corresponding space on the main
4328
stack is free.
4329
 
4330
Do not define this pattern if all that must be done is the subtraction.
4331
Some machines require other operations such as stack probes or
4332
maintaining the back chain.  Define this pattern to emit those
4333
operations in addition to updating the stack pointer.
4334
 
4335
@cindex @code{check_stack} instruction pattern
4336
@item @samp{check_stack}
4337
If stack checking cannot be done on your system by probing the stack with
4338
a load or store instruction (@pxref{Stack Checking}), define this pattern
4339
to perform the needed check and signaling an error if the stack
4340
has overflowed.  The single operand is the location in the stack furthest
4341
from the current stack pointer that you need to validate.  Normally,
4342
on machines where this pattern is needed, you would obtain the stack
4343
limit from a global or thread-specific variable or register.
4344
 
4345
@cindex @code{nonlocal_goto} instruction pattern
4346
@item @samp{nonlocal_goto}
4347
Emit code to generate a non-local goto, e.g., a jump from one function
4348
to a label in an outer function.  This pattern has four arguments,
4349
each representing a value to be used in the jump.  The first
4350
argument is to be loaded into the frame pointer, the second is
4351
the address to branch to (code to dispatch to the actual label),
4352
the third is the address of a location where the stack is saved,
4353
and the last is the address of the label, to be placed in the
4354
location for the incoming static chain.
4355
 
4356
On most machines you need not define this pattern, since GCC will
4357
already generate the correct code, which is to load the frame pointer
4358
and static chain, restore the stack (using the
4359
@samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} pattern, if defined), and jump indirectly
4360
to the dispatcher.  You need only define this pattern if this code will
4361
not work on your machine.
4362
 
4363
@cindex @code{nonlocal_goto_receiver} instruction pattern
4364
@item @samp{nonlocal_goto_receiver}
4365
This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the target of a
4366
nonlocal goto after the code already generated by GCC@.  You will not
4367
normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you might
4368
need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global table,
4369
must be restored when the frame pointer is restored.  Note that a nonlocal
4370
goto only occurs within a unit-of-translation, so a global table pointer
4371
that is shared by all functions of a given module need not be restored.
4372
There are no arguments.
4373
 
4374
@cindex @code{exception_receiver} instruction pattern
4375
@item @samp{exception_receiver}
4376
This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of an
4377
exception handler that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto.  You
4378
will not normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you
4379
might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global
4380
table, must be restored after control flow is branched to the handler of
4381
an exception.  There are no arguments.
4382
 
4383
@cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_setup} instruction pattern
4384
@item @samp{builtin_setjmp_setup}
4385
This pattern, if defined, contains additional code needed to initialize
4386
the @code{jmp_buf}.  You will not normally need to define this pattern.
4387
A typical reason why you might need this pattern is if some value, such
4388
as a pointer to a global table, must be restored.  Though it is
4389
preferred that the pointer value be recalculated if possible (given the
4390
address of a label for instance).  The single argument is a pointer to
4391
the @code{jmp_buf}.  Note that the buffer is five words long and that
4392
the first three are normally used by the generic mechanism.
4393
 
4394
@cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_receiver} instruction pattern
4395
@item @samp{builtin_setjmp_receiver}
4396
This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of an
4397
built-in setjmp that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto.  You
4398
will not normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you
4399
might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global
4400
table, must be restored.  It takes one argument, which is the label
4401
to which builtin_longjmp transfered control; this pattern may be emitted
4402
at a small offset from that label.
4403
 
4404
@cindex @code{builtin_longjmp} instruction pattern
4405
@item @samp{builtin_longjmp}
4406
This pattern, if defined, performs the entire action of the longjmp.
4407
You will not normally need to define this pattern unless you also define
4408
@code{builtin_setjmp_setup}.  The single argument is a pointer to the
4409
@code{jmp_buf}.
4410
 
4411
@cindex @code{eh_return} instruction pattern
4412
@item @samp{eh_return}
4413
This pattern, if defined, affects the way @code{__builtin_eh_return},
4414
and thence the call frame exception handling library routines, are
4415
built.  It is intended to handle non-trivial actions needed along
4416
the abnormal return path.
4417
 
4418
The address of the exception handler to which the function should return
4419
is passed as operand to this pattern.  It will normally need to copied by
4420
the pattern to some special register or memory location.
4421
If the pattern needs to determine the location of the target call
4422
frame in order to do so, it may use @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX},
4423
if defined; it will have already been assigned.
4424
 
4425
If this pattern is not defined, the default action will be to simply
4426
copy the return address to @code{EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX}.  Either
4427
that macro or this pattern needs to be defined if call frame exception
4428
handling is to be used.
4429
 
4430
@cindex @code{prologue} instruction pattern
4431
@anchor{prologue instruction pattern}
4432
@item @samp{prologue}
4433
This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for entry to a function.  The function
4434
entry is responsible for setting up the stack frame, initializing the frame
4435
pointer register, saving callee saved registers, etc.
4436
 
4437
Using a prologue pattern is generally preferred over defining
4438
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} to emit assembly code for the prologue.
4439
 
4440
The @code{prologue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform
4441
instruction scheduling.
4442
 
4443
@cindex @code{epilogue} instruction pattern
4444
@anchor{epilogue instruction pattern}
4445
@item @samp{epilogue}
4446
This pattern emits RTL for exit from a function.  The function
4447
exit is responsible for deallocating the stack frame, restoring callee saved
4448
registers and emitting the return instruction.
4449
 
4450
Using an epilogue pattern is generally preferred over defining
4451
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to emit assembly code for the epilogue.
4452
 
4453
The @code{epilogue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform
4454
instruction scheduling or which have delay slots for their return instruction.
4455
 
4456
@cindex @code{sibcall_epilogue} instruction pattern
4457
@item @samp{sibcall_epilogue}
4458
This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for exit from a function without the final
4459
branch back to the calling function.  This pattern will be emitted before any
4460
sibling call (aka tail call) sites.
4461
 
4462
The @code{sibcall_epilogue} pattern must not clobber any arguments used for
4463
parameter passing or any stack slots for arguments passed to the current
4464
function.
4465
 
4466
@cindex @code{trap} instruction pattern
4467
@item @samp{trap}
4468
This pattern, if defined, signals an error, typically by causing some
4469
kind of signal to be raised.  Among other places, it is used by the Java
4470
front end to signal `invalid array index' exceptions.
4471
 
4472
@cindex @code{conditional_trap} instruction pattern
4473
@item @samp{conditional_trap}
4474
Conditional trap instruction.  Operand 0 is a piece of RTL which
4475
performs a comparison.  Operand 1 is the trap code, an integer.
4476
 
4477
A typical @code{conditional_trap} pattern looks like
4478
 
4479
@smallexample
4480
(define_insn "conditional_trap"
4481
  [(trap_if (match_operator 0 "trap_operator"
4482
             [(cc0) (const_int 0)])
4483
            (match_operand 1 "const_int_operand" "i"))]
4484
  ""
4485
  "@dots{}")
4486
@end smallexample
4487
 
4488
@cindex @code{prefetch} instruction pattern
4489
@item @samp{prefetch}
4490
 
4491
This pattern, if defined, emits code for a non-faulting data prefetch
4492
instruction.  Operand 0 is the address of the memory to prefetch.  Operand 1
4493
is a constant 1 if the prefetch is preparing for a write to the memory
4494
address, or a constant 0 otherwise.  Operand 2 is the expected degree of
4495
temporal locality of the data and is a value between 0 and 3, inclusive; 0
4496
means that the data has no temporal locality, so it need not be left in the
4497
cache after the access; 3 means that the data has a high degree of temporal
4498
locality and should be left in all levels of cache possible;  1 and 2 mean,
4499
respectively, a low or moderate degree of temporal locality.
4500
 
4501
Targets that do not support write prefetches or locality hints can ignore
4502
the values of operands 1 and 2.
4503
 
4504
@cindex @code{memory_barrier} instruction pattern
4505
@item @samp{memory_barrier}
4506
 
4507
If the target memory model is not fully synchronous, then this pattern
4508
should be defined to an instruction that orders both loads and stores
4509
before the instruction with respect to loads and stores after the instruction.
4510
This pattern has no operands.
4511
 
4512
@cindex @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4513
@item @samp{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}
4514
 
4515
This pattern, if defined, emits code for an atomic compare-and-swap
4516
operation.  Operand 1 is the memory on which the atomic operation is
4517
performed.  Operand 2 is the ``old'' value to be compared against the
4518
current contents of the memory location.  Operand 3 is the ``new'' value
4519
to store in the memory if the compare succeeds.  Operand 0 is the result
4520
of the operation; it should contain the contents of the memory
4521
before the operation.  If the compare succeeds, this should obviously be
4522
a copy of operand 2.
4523
 
4524
This pattern must show that both operand 0 and operand 1 are modified.
4525
 
4526
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
4527
memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
4528
operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
4529
after the atomic operation.
4530
 
4531
@cindex @code{sync_compare_and_swap_cc@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4532
@item @samp{sync_compare_and_swap_cc@var{mode}}
4533
 
4534
This pattern is just like @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}, except
4535
it should act as if compare part of the compare-and-swap were issued via
4536
@code{cmp@var{m}}.  This comparison will only be used with @code{EQ} and
4537
@code{NE} branches and @code{setcc} operations.
4538
 
4539
Some targets do expose the success or failure of the compare-and-swap
4540
operation via the status flags.  Ideally we wouldn't need a separate
4541
named pattern in order to take advantage of this, but the combine pass
4542
does not handle patterns with multiple sets, which is required by
4543
definition for @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}.
4544
 
4545
@cindex @code{sync_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4546
@cindex @code{sync_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4547
@cindex @code{sync_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4548
@cindex @code{sync_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4549
@cindex @code{sync_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4550
@cindex @code{sync_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4551
@item @samp{sync_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_sub@var{mode}}
4552
@itemx @samp{sync_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_and@var{mode}}
4553
@itemx @samp{sync_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_nand@var{mode}}
4554
 
4555
These patterns emit code for an atomic operation on memory.
4556
Operand 0 is the memory on which the atomic operation is performed.
4557
Operand 1 is the second operand to the binary operator.
4558
 
4559
The ``nand'' operation is @code{~op0 & op1}.
4560
 
4561
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
4562
memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
4563
operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
4564
after the atomic operation.
4565
 
4566
If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed
4567
from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
4568
 
4569
@cindex @code{sync_old_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4570
@cindex @code{sync_old_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4571
@cindex @code{sync_old_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4572
@cindex @code{sync_old_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4573
@cindex @code{sync_old_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4574
@cindex @code{sync_old_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4575
@item @samp{sync_old_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_sub@var{mode}}
4576
@itemx @samp{sync_old_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_and@var{mode}}
4577
@itemx @samp{sync_old_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_nand@var{mode}}
4578
 
4579
These patterns are emit code for an atomic operation on memory,
4580
and return the value that the memory contained before the operation.
4581
Operand 0 is the result value, operand 1 is the memory on which the
4582
atomic operation is performed, and operand 2 is the second operand
4583
to the binary operator.
4584
 
4585
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
4586
memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
4587
operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
4588
after the atomic operation.
4589
 
4590
If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed
4591
from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
4592
 
4593
@cindex @code{sync_new_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4594
@cindex @code{sync_new_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4595
@cindex @code{sync_new_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4596
@cindex @code{sync_new_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4597
@cindex @code{sync_new_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4598
@cindex @code{sync_new_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4599
@item @samp{sync_new_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_sub@var{mode}}
4600
@itemx @samp{sync_new_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_and@var{mode}}
4601
@itemx @samp{sync_new_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_nand@var{mode}}
4602
 
4603
These patterns are like their @code{sync_old_@var{op}} counterparts,
4604
except that they return the value that exists in the memory location
4605
after the operation, rather than before the operation.
4606
 
4607
@cindex @code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4608
@item @samp{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}
4609
 
4610
This pattern takes two forms, based on the capabilities of the target.
4611
In either case, operand 0 is the result of the operand, operand 1 is
4612
the memory on which the atomic operation is performed, and operand 2
4613
is the value to set in the lock.
4614
 
4615
In the ideal case, this operation is an atomic exchange operation, in
4616
which the previous value in memory operand is copied into the result
4617
operand, and the value operand is stored in the memory operand.
4618
 
4619
For less capable targets, any value operand that is not the constant 1
4620
should be rejected with @code{FAIL}.  In this case the target may use
4621
an atomic test-and-set bit operation.  The result operand should contain
4622
1 if the bit was previously set and 0 if the bit was previously clear.
4623
The true contents of the memory operand are implementation defined.
4624
 
4625
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the
4626
pattern as a whole acts as an acquire barrier, that is all memory
4627
operations after the pattern do not occur until the lock is acquired.
4628
 
4629
If this pattern is not defined, the operation will be constructed from
4630
a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
4631
 
4632
@cindex @code{sync_lock_release@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4633
@item @samp{sync_lock_release@var{mode}}
4634
 
4635
This pattern, if defined, releases a lock set by
4636
@code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}.  Operand 0 is the memory
4637
that contains the lock; operand 1 is the value to store in the lock.
4638
 
4639
If the target doesn't implement full semantics for
4640
@code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}, any value operand which is not
4641
the constant 0 should be rejected with @code{FAIL}, and the true contents
4642
of the memory operand are implementation defined.
4643
 
4644
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the
4645
pattern as a whole acts as a release barrier, that is the lock is
4646
released only after all previous memory operations have completed.
4647
 
4648
If this pattern is not defined, then a @code{memory_barrier} pattern
4649
will be emitted, followed by a store of the value to the memory operand.
4650
 
4651
@cindex @code{stack_protect_set} instruction pattern
4652
@item @samp{stack_protect_set}
4653
 
4654
This pattern, if defined, moves a @code{Pmode} value from the memory
4655
in operand 1 to the memory in operand 0 without leaving the value in
4656
a register afterward.  This is to avoid leaking the value some place
4657
that an attacker might use to rewrite the stack guard slot after
4658
having clobbered it.
4659
 
4660
If this pattern is not defined, then a plain move pattern is generated.
4661
 
4662
@cindex @code{stack_protect_test} instruction pattern
4663
@item @samp{stack_protect_test}
4664
 
4665
This pattern, if defined, compares a @code{Pmode} value from the
4666
memory in operand 1 with the memory in operand 0 without leaving the
4667
value in a register afterward and branches to operand 2 if the values
4668
weren't equal.
4669
 
4670
If this pattern is not defined, then a plain compare pattern and
4671
conditional branch pattern is used.
4672
 
4673
@end table
4674
 
4675
@end ifset
4676
@c Each of the following nodes are wrapped in separate
4677
@c "@ifset INTERNALS" to work around memory limits for the default
4678
@c configuration in older tetex distributions.  Known to not work:
4679
@c tetex-1.0.7, known to work: tetex-2.0.2.
4680
@ifset INTERNALS
4681
@node Pattern Ordering
4682
@section When the Order of Patterns Matters
4683
@cindex Pattern Ordering
4684
@cindex Ordering of Patterns
4685
 
4686
Sometimes an insn can match more than one instruction pattern.  Then the
4687
pattern that appears first in the machine description is the one used.
4688
Therefore, more specific patterns (patterns that will match fewer things)
4689
and faster instructions (those that will produce better code when they
4690
do match) should usually go first in the description.
4691
 
4692
In some cases the effect of ordering the patterns can be used to hide
4693
a pattern when it is not valid.  For example, the 68000 has an
4694
instruction for converting a fullword to floating point and another
4695
for converting a byte to floating point.  An instruction converting
4696
an integer to floating point could match either one.  We put the
4697
pattern to convert the fullword first to make sure that one will
4698
be used rather than the other.  (Otherwise a large integer might
4699
be generated as a single-byte immediate quantity, which would not work.)
4700
Instead of using this pattern ordering it would be possible to make the
4701
pattern for convert-a-byte smart enough to deal properly with any
4702
constant value.
4703
 
4704
@end ifset
4705
@ifset INTERNALS
4706
@node Dependent Patterns
4707
@section Interdependence of Patterns
4708
@cindex Dependent Patterns
4709
@cindex Interdependence of Patterns
4710
 
4711
Every machine description must have a named pattern for each of the
4712
conditional branch names @samp{b@var{cond}}.  The recognition template
4713
must always have the form
4714
 
4715
@smallexample
4716
(set (pc)
4717
     (if_then_else (@var{cond} (cc0) (const_int 0))
4718
                   (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" ""))
4719
                   (pc)))
4720
@end smallexample
4721
 
4722
@noindent
4723
In addition, every machine description must have an anonymous pattern
4724
for each of the possible reverse-conditional branches.  Their templates
4725
look like
4726
 
4727
@smallexample
4728
(set (pc)
4729
     (if_then_else (@var{cond} (cc0) (const_int 0))
4730
                   (pc)
4731
                   (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" ""))))
4732
@end smallexample
4733
 
4734
@noindent
4735
They are necessary because jump optimization can turn direct-conditional
4736
branches into reverse-conditional branches.
4737
 
4738
It is often convenient to use the @code{match_operator} construct to
4739
reduce the number of patterns that must be specified for branches.  For
4740
example,
4741
 
4742
@smallexample
4743
(define_insn ""
4744
  [(set (pc)
4745
        (if_then_else (match_operator 0 "comparison_operator"
4746
                                      [(cc0) (const_int 0)])
4747
                      (pc)
4748
                      (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))))]
4749
  "@var{condition}"
4750
  "@dots{}")
4751
@end smallexample
4752
 
4753
In some cases machines support instructions identical except for the
4754
machine mode of one or more operands.  For example, there may be
4755
``sign-extend halfword'' and ``sign-extend byte'' instructions whose
4756
patterns are
4757
 
4758
@smallexample
4759
(set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{})
4760
     (extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 @dots{})))
4761
 
4762
(set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{})
4763
     (extend:SI (match_operand:QI 1 @dots{})))
4764
@end smallexample
4765
 
4766
@noindent
4767
Constant integers do not specify a machine mode, so an instruction to
4768
extend a constant value could match either pattern.  The pattern it
4769
actually will match is the one that appears first in the file.  For correct
4770
results, this must be the one for the widest possible mode (@code{HImode},
4771
here).  If the pattern matches the @code{QImode} instruction, the results
4772
will be incorrect if the constant value does not actually fit that mode.
4773
 
4774
Such instructions to extend constants are rarely generated because they are
4775
optimized away, but they do occasionally happen in nonoptimized
4776
compilations.
4777
 
4778
If a constraint in a pattern allows a constant, the reload pass may
4779
replace a register with a constant permitted by the constraint in some
4780
cases.  Similarly for memory references.  Because of this substitution,
4781
you should not provide separate patterns for increment and decrement
4782
instructions.  Instead, they should be generated from the same pattern
4783
that supports register-register add insns by examining the operands and
4784
generating the appropriate machine instruction.
4785
 
4786
@end ifset
4787
@ifset INTERNALS
4788
@node Jump Patterns
4789
@section Defining Jump Instruction Patterns
4790
@cindex jump instruction patterns
4791
@cindex defining jump instruction patterns
4792
 
4793
For most machines, GCC assumes that the machine has a condition code.
4794
A comparison insn sets the condition code, recording the results of both
4795
signed and unsigned comparison of the given operands.  A separate branch
4796
insn tests the condition code and branches or not according its value.
4797
The branch insns come in distinct signed and unsigned flavors.  Many
4798
common machines, such as the VAX, the 68000 and the 32000, work this
4799
way.
4800
 
4801
Some machines have distinct signed and unsigned compare instructions, and
4802
only one set of conditional branch instructions.  The easiest way to handle
4803
these machines is to treat them just like the others until the final stage
4804
where assembly code is written.  At this time, when outputting code for the
4805
compare instruction, peek ahead at the following branch using
4806
@code{next_cc0_user (insn)}.  (The variable @code{insn} refers to the insn
4807
being output, in the output-writing code in an instruction pattern.)  If
4808
the RTL says that is an unsigned branch, output an unsigned compare;
4809
otherwise output a signed compare.  When the branch itself is output, you
4810
can treat signed and unsigned branches identically.
4811
 
4812
The reason you can do this is that GCC always generates a pair of
4813
consecutive RTL insns, possibly separated by @code{note} insns, one to
4814
set the condition code and one to test it, and keeps the pair inviolate
4815
until the end.
4816
 
4817
To go with this technique, you must define the machine-description macro
4818
@code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} to do @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}; in other words, no
4819
compare instruction is superfluous.
4820
 
4821
Some machines have compare-and-branch instructions and no condition code.
4822
A similar technique works for them.  When it is time to ``output'' a
4823
compare instruction, record its operands in two static variables.  When
4824
outputting the branch-on-condition-code instruction that follows, actually
4825
output a compare-and-branch instruction that uses the remembered operands.
4826
 
4827
It also works to define patterns for compare-and-branch instructions.
4828
In optimizing compilation, the pair of compare and branch instructions
4829
will be combined according to these patterns.  But this does not happen
4830
if optimization is not requested.  So you must use one of the solutions
4831
above in addition to any special patterns you define.
4832
 
4833
In many RISC machines, most instructions do not affect the condition
4834
code and there may not even be a separate condition code register.  On
4835
these machines, the restriction that the definition and use of the
4836
condition code be adjacent insns is not necessary and can prevent
4837
important optimizations.  For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there is a
4838
delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set three
4839
instructions earlier than the conditional branch.  The instruction
4840
scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4841
separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4842
 
4843
On these machines, do not use @code{(cc0)}, but instead use a register
4844
to represent the condition code.  If there is a specific condition code
4845
register in the machine, use a hard register.  If the condition code or
4846
comparison result can be placed in any general register, or if there are
4847
multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4848
 
4849
@findex prev_cc0_setter
4850
@findex next_cc0_user
4851
On some machines, the type of branch instruction generated may depend on
4852
the way the condition code was produced; for example, on the 68k and
4853
SPARC, setting the condition code directly from an add or subtract
4854
instruction does not clear the overflow bit the way that a test
4855
instruction does, so a different branch instruction must be used for
4856
some conditional branches.  For machines that use @code{(cc0)}, the set
4857
and use of the condition code must be adjacent (separated only by
4858
@code{note} insns) allowing flags in @code{cc_status} to be used.
4859
(@xref{Condition Code}.)  Also, the comparison and branch insns can be
4860
located from each other by using the functions @code{prev_cc0_setter}
4861
and @code{next_cc0_user}.
4862
 
4863
However, this is not true on machines that do not use @code{(cc0)}.  On
4864
those machines, no assumptions can be made about the adjacency of the
4865
compare and branch insns and the above methods cannot be used.  Instead,
4866
we use the machine mode of the condition code register to record
4867
different formats of the condition code register.
4868
 
4869
Registers used to store the condition code value should have a mode that
4870
is in class @code{MODE_CC}.  Normally, it will be @code{CCmode}.  If
4871
additional modes are required (as for the add example mentioned above in
4872
the SPARC), define them in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}
4873
(@pxref{Condition Code}).  Also define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4874
a mode given an operand of a compare.
4875
 
4876
If it is known during RTL generation that a different mode will be
4877
required (for example, if the machine has separate compare instructions
4878
for signed and unsigned quantities, like most IBM processors), they can
4879
be specified at that time.
4880
 
4881
If the cases that require different modes would be made by instruction
4882
combination, the macro @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} determines which machine
4883
mode should be used for the comparison result.  The patterns should be
4884
written using that mode.  To support the case of the add on the SPARC
4885
discussed above, we have the pattern
4886
 
4887
@smallexample
4888
(define_insn ""
4889
  [(set (reg:CC_NOOV 0)
4890
        (compare:CC_NOOV
4891
          (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4892
                   (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4893
          (const_int 0)))]
4894
  ""
4895
  "@dots{}")
4896
@end smallexample
4897
 
4898
The @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} macro on the SPARC returns @code{CC_NOOVmode}
4899
for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}.
4900
 
4901
@end ifset
4902
@ifset INTERNALS
4903
@node Looping Patterns
4904
@section Defining Looping Instruction Patterns
4905
@cindex looping instruction patterns
4906
@cindex defining looping instruction patterns
4907
 
4908
Some machines have special jump instructions that can be utilized to
4909
make loops more efficient.  A common example is the 68000 @samp{dbra}
4910
instruction which performs a decrement of a register and a branch if the
4911
result was greater than zero.  Other machines, in particular digital
4912
signal processors (DSPs), have special block repeat instructions to
4913
provide low-overhead loop support.  For example, the TI TMS320C3x/C4x
4914
DSPs have a block repeat instruction that loads special registers to
4915
mark the top and end of a loop and to count the number of loop
4916
iterations.  This avoids the need for fetching and executing a
4917
@samp{dbra}-like instruction and avoids pipeline stalls associated with
4918
the jump.
4919
 
4920
GCC has three special named patterns to support low overhead looping.
4921
They are @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, @samp{doloop_begin},
4922
and @samp{doloop_end}.  The first pattern,
4923
@samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, is not emitted during RTL
4924
generation but may be emitted during the instruction combination phase.
4925
This requires the assistance of the loop optimizer, using information
4926
collected during strength reduction, to reverse a loop to count down to
4927
zero.  Some targets also require the loop optimizer to add a
4928
@code{REG_NONNEG} note to indicate that the iteration count is always
4929
positive.  This is needed if the target performs a signed loop
4930
termination test.  For example, the 68000 uses a pattern similar to the
4931
following for its @code{dbra} instruction:
4932
 
4933
@smallexample
4934
@group
4935
(define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero"
4936
  [(set (pc)
4937
        (if_then_else
4938
          (ge (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am")
4939
                       (const_int -1))
4940
              (const_int 0))
4941
          (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))
4942
          (pc)))
4943
   (set (match_dup 0)
4944
        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
4945
                 (const_int -1)))]
4946
  "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)"
4947
  "@dots{}")
4948
@end group
4949
@end smallexample
4950
 
4951
Note that since the insn is both a jump insn and has an output, it must
4952
deal with its own reloads, hence the `m' constraints.  Also note that
4953
since this insn is generated by the instruction combination phase
4954
combining two sequential insns together into an implicit parallel insn,
4955
the iteration counter needs to be biased by the same amount as the
4956
decrement operation, in this case @minus{}1.  Note that the following similar
4957
pattern will not be matched by the combiner.
4958
 
4959
@smallexample
4960
@group
4961
(define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero"
4962
  [(set (pc)
4963
        (if_then_else
4964
          (ge (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am")
4965
              (const_int 1))
4966
          (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))
4967
          (pc)))
4968
   (set (match_dup 0)
4969
        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
4970
                 (const_int -1)))]
4971
  "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)"
4972
  "@dots{}")
4973
@end group
4974
@end smallexample
4975
 
4976
The other two special looping patterns, @samp{doloop_begin} and
4977
@samp{doloop_end}, are emitted by the loop optimizer for certain
4978
well-behaved loops with a finite number of loop iterations using
4979
information collected during strength reduction.
4980
 
4981
The @samp{doloop_end} pattern describes the actual looping instruction
4982
(or the implicit looping operation) and the @samp{doloop_begin} pattern
4983
is an optional companion pattern that can be used for initialization
4984
needed for some low-overhead looping instructions.
4985
 
4986
Note that some machines require the actual looping instruction to be
4987
emitted at the top of the loop (e.g., the TMS320C3x/C4x DSPs).  Emitting
4988
the true RTL for a looping instruction at the top of the loop can cause
4989
problems with flow analysis.  So instead, a dummy @code{doloop} insn is
4990
emitted at the end of the loop.  The machine dependent reorg pass checks
4991
for the presence of this @code{doloop} insn and then searches back to
4992
the top of the loop, where it inserts the true looping insn (provided
4993
there are no instructions in the loop which would cause problems).  Any
4994
additional labels can be emitted at this point.  In addition, if the
4995
desired special iteration counter register was not allocated, this
4996
machine dependent reorg pass could emit a traditional compare and jump
4997
instruction pair.
4998
 
4999
The essential difference between the
5000
@samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} and the @samp{doloop_end}
5001
patterns is that the loop optimizer allocates an additional pseudo
5002
register for the latter as an iteration counter.  This pseudo register
5003
cannot be used within the loop (i.e., general induction variables cannot
5004
be derived from it), however, in many cases the loop induction variable
5005
may become redundant and removed by the flow pass.
5006
 
5007
 
5008
@end ifset
5009
@ifset INTERNALS
5010
@node Insn Canonicalizations
5011
@section Canonicalization of Instructions
5012
@cindex canonicalization of instructions
5013
@cindex insn canonicalization
5014
 
5015
There are often cases where multiple RTL expressions could represent an
5016
operation performed by a single machine instruction.  This situation is
5017
most commonly encountered with logical, branch, and multiply-accumulate
5018
instructions.  In such cases, the compiler attempts to convert these
5019
multiple RTL expressions into a single canonical form to reduce the
5020
number of insn patterns required.
5021
 
5022
In addition to algebraic simplifications, following canonicalizations
5023
are performed:
5024
 
5025
@itemize @bullet
5026
@item
5027
For commutative and comparison operators, a constant is always made the
5028
second operand.  If a machine only supports a constant as the second
5029
operand, only patterns that match a constant in the second operand need
5030
be supplied.
5031
 
5032
@item
5033
For associative operators, a sequence of operators will always chain
5034
to the left; for instance, only the left operand of an integer @code{plus}
5035
can itself be a @code{plus}.  @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor},
5036
@code{plus}, @code{mult}, @code{smin}, @code{smax}, @code{umin}, and
5037
@code{umax} are associative when applied to integers, and sometimes to
5038
floating-point.
5039
 
5040
@item
5041
@cindex @code{neg}, canonicalization of
5042
@cindex @code{not}, canonicalization of
5043
@cindex @code{mult}, canonicalization of
5044
@cindex @code{plus}, canonicalization of
5045
@cindex @code{minus}, canonicalization of
5046
For these operators, if only one operand is a @code{neg}, @code{not},
5047
@code{mult}, @code{plus}, or @code{minus} expression, it will be the
5048
first operand.
5049
 
5050
@item
5051
In combinations of @code{neg}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, and
5052
@code{minus}, the @code{neg} operations (if any) will be moved inside
5053
the operations as far as possible.  For instance,
5054
@code{(neg (mult A B))} is canonicalized as @code{(mult (neg A) B)}, but
5055
@code{(plus (mult (neg A) B) C)} is canonicalized as
5056
@code{(minus A (mult B C))}.
5057
 
5058
@cindex @code{compare}, canonicalization of
5059
@item
5060
For the @code{compare} operator, a constant is always the second operand
5061
on machines where @code{cc0} is used (@pxref{Jump Patterns}).  On other
5062
machines, there are rare cases where the compiler might want to construct
5063
a @code{compare} with a constant as the first operand.  However, these
5064
cases are not common enough for it to be worthwhile to provide a pattern
5065
matching a constant as the first operand unless the machine actually has
5066
such an instruction.
5067
 
5068
An operand of @code{neg}, @code{not}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, or
5069
@code{minus} is made the first operand under the same conditions as
5070
above.
5071
 
5072
@item
5073
@code{(minus @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))} is converted to
5074
@code{(plus @var{x} (const_int @var{-n}))}.
5075
 
5076
@item
5077
Within address computations (i.e., inside @code{mem}), a left shift is
5078
converted into the appropriate multiplication by a power of two.
5079
 
5080
@cindex @code{ior}, canonicalization of
5081
@cindex @code{and}, canonicalization of
5082
@cindex De Morgan's law
5083
@item
5084
De Morgan's Law is used to move bitwise negation inside a bitwise
5085
logical-and or logical-or operation.  If this results in only one
5086
operand being a @code{not} expression, it will be the first one.
5087
 
5088
A machine that has an instruction that performs a bitwise logical-and of one
5089
operand with the bitwise negation of the other should specify the pattern
5090
for that instruction as
5091
 
5092
@smallexample
5093
(define_insn ""
5094
  [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})
5095
        (and:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{}))
5096
                     (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{})))]
5097
  "@dots{}"
5098
  "@dots{}")
5099
@end smallexample
5100
 
5101
@noindent
5102
Similarly, a pattern for a ``NAND'' instruction should be written
5103
 
5104
@smallexample
5105
(define_insn ""
5106
  [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})
5107
        (ior:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{}))
5108
                     (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{}))))]
5109
  "@dots{}"
5110
  "@dots{}")
5111
@end smallexample
5112
 
5113
In both cases, it is not necessary to include patterns for the many
5114
logically equivalent RTL expressions.
5115
 
5116
@cindex @code{xor}, canonicalization of
5117
@item
5118
The only possible RTL expressions involving both bitwise exclusive-or
5119
and bitwise negation are @code{(xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y})}
5120
and @code{(not:@var{m} (xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}))}.
5121
 
5122
@item
5123
The sum of three items, one of which is a constant, will only appear in
5124
the form
5125
 
5126
@smallexample
5127
(plus:@var{m} (plus:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}) @var{constant})
5128
@end smallexample
5129
 
5130
@item
5131
On machines that do not use @code{cc0},
5132
@code{(compare @var{x} (const_int 0))} will be converted to
5133
@var{x}.
5134
 
5135
@cindex @code{zero_extract}, canonicalization of
5136
@cindex @code{sign_extract}, canonicalization of
5137
@item
5138
Equality comparisons of a group of bits (usually a single bit) with zero
5139
will be written using @code{zero_extract} rather than the equivalent
5140
@code{and} or @code{sign_extract} operations.
5141
 
5142
@end itemize
5143
 
5144
Further canonicalization rules are defined in the function
5145
@code{commutative_operand_precedence} in @file{gcc/rtlanal.c}.
5146
 
5147
@end ifset
5148
@ifset INTERNALS
5149
@node Expander Definitions
5150
@section Defining RTL Sequences for Code Generation
5151
@cindex expander definitions
5152
@cindex code generation RTL sequences
5153
@cindex defining RTL sequences for code generation
5154
 
5155
On some target machines, some standard pattern names for RTL generation
5156
cannot be handled with single insn, but a sequence of RTL insns can
5157
represent them.  For these target machines, you can write a
5158
@code{define_expand} to specify how to generate the sequence of RTL@.
5159
 
5160
@findex define_expand
5161
A @code{define_expand} is an RTL expression that looks almost like a
5162
@code{define_insn}; but, unlike the latter, a @code{define_expand} is used
5163
only for RTL generation and it can produce more than one RTL insn.
5164
 
5165
A @code{define_expand} RTX has four operands:
5166
 
5167
@itemize @bullet
5168
@item
5169
The name.  Each @code{define_expand} must have a name, since the only
5170
use for it is to refer to it by name.
5171
 
5172
@item
5173
The RTL template.  This is a vector of RTL expressions representing
5174
a sequence of separate instructions.  Unlike @code{define_insn}, there
5175
is no implicit surrounding @code{PARALLEL}.
5176
 
5177
@item
5178
The condition, a string containing a C expression.  This expression is
5179
used to express how the availability of this pattern depends on
5180
subclasses of target machine, selected by command-line options when GCC
5181
is run.  This is just like the condition of a @code{define_insn} that
5182
has a standard name.  Therefore, the condition (if present) may not
5183
depend on the data in the insn being matched, but only the
5184
target-machine-type flags.  The compiler needs to test these conditions
5185
during initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions
5186
are available in a particular run.
5187
 
5188
@item
5189
The preparation statements, a string containing zero or more C
5190
statements which are to be executed before RTL code is generated from
5191
the RTL template.
5192
 
5193
Usually these statements prepare temporary registers for use as
5194
internal operands in the RTL template, but they can also generate RTL
5195
insns directly by calling routines such as @code{emit_insn}, etc.
5196
Any such insns precede the ones that come from the RTL template.
5197
@end itemize
5198
 
5199
Every RTL insn emitted by a @code{define_expand} must match some
5200
@code{define_insn} in the machine description.  Otherwise, the compiler
5201
will crash when trying to generate code for the insn or trying to optimize
5202
it.
5203
 
5204
The RTL template, in addition to controlling generation of RTL insns,
5205
also describes the operands that need to be specified when this pattern
5206
is used.  In particular, it gives a predicate for each operand.
5207
 
5208
A true operand, which needs to be specified in order to generate RTL from
5209
the pattern, should be described with a @code{match_operand} in its first
5210
occurrence in the RTL template.  This enters information on the operand's
5211
predicate into the tables that record such things.  GCC uses the
5212
information to preload the operand into a register if that is required for
5213
valid RTL code.  If the operand is referred to more than once, subsequent
5214
references should use @code{match_dup}.
5215
 
5216
The RTL template may also refer to internal ``operands'' which are
5217
temporary registers or labels used only within the sequence made by the
5218
@code{define_expand}.  Internal operands are substituted into the RTL
5219
template with @code{match_dup}, never with @code{match_operand}.  The
5220
values of the internal operands are not passed in as arguments by the
5221
compiler when it requests use of this pattern.  Instead, they are computed
5222
within the pattern, in the preparation statements.  These statements
5223
compute the values and store them into the appropriate elements of
5224
@code{operands} so that @code{match_dup} can find them.
5225
 
5226
There are two special macros defined for use in the preparation statements:
5227
@code{DONE} and @code{FAIL}.  Use them with a following semicolon,
5228
as a statement.
5229
 
5230
@table @code
5231
 
5232
@findex DONE
5233
@item DONE
5234
Use the @code{DONE} macro to end RTL generation for the pattern.  The
5235
only RTL insns resulting from the pattern on this occasion will be
5236
those already emitted by explicit calls to @code{emit_insn} within the
5237
preparation statements; the RTL template will not be generated.
5238
 
5239
@findex FAIL
5240
@item FAIL
5241
Make the pattern fail on this occasion.  When a pattern fails, it means
5242
that the pattern was not truly available.  The calling routines in the
5243
compiler will try other strategies for code generation using other patterns.
5244
 
5245
Failure is currently supported only for binary (addition, multiplication,
5246
shifting, etc.) and bit-field (@code{extv}, @code{extzv}, and @code{insv})
5247
operations.
5248
@end table
5249
 
5250
If the preparation falls through (invokes neither @code{DONE} nor
5251
@code{FAIL}), then the @code{define_expand} acts like a
5252
@code{define_insn} in that the RTL template is used to generate the
5253
insn.
5254
 
5255
The RTL template is not used for matching, only for generating the
5256
initial insn list.  If the preparation statement always invokes
5257
@code{DONE} or @code{FAIL}, the RTL template may be reduced to a simple
5258
list of operands, such as this example:
5259
 
5260
@smallexample
5261
@group
5262
(define_expand "addsi3"
5263
  [(match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5264
   (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "")
5265
   (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "")]
5266
@end group
5267
@group
5268
  ""
5269
  "
5270
@{
5271
  handle_add (operands[0], operands[1], operands[2]);
5272
  DONE;
5273
@}")
5274
@end group
5275
@end smallexample
5276
 
5277
Here is an example, the definition of left-shift for the SPUR chip:
5278
 
5279
@smallexample
5280
@group
5281
(define_expand "ashlsi3"
5282
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5283
        (ashift:SI
5284
@end group
5285
@group
5286
          (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "")
5287
          (match_operand:SI 2 "nonmemory_operand" "")))]
5288
  ""
5289
  "
5290
@end group
5291
@end smallexample
5292
 
5293
@smallexample
5294
@group
5295
@{
5296
  if (GET_CODE (operands[2]) != CONST_INT
5297
      || (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) > 3)
5298
    FAIL;
5299
@}")
5300
@end group
5301
@end smallexample
5302
 
5303
@noindent
5304
This example uses @code{define_expand} so that it can generate an RTL insn
5305
for shifting when the shift-count is in the supported range of 0 to 3 but
5306
fail in other cases where machine insns aren't available.  When it fails,
5307
the compiler tries another strategy using different patterns (such as, a
5308
library call).
5309
 
5310
If the compiler were able to handle nontrivial condition-strings in
5311
patterns with names, then it would be possible to use a
5312
@code{define_insn} in that case.  Here is another case (zero-extension
5313
on the 68000) which makes more use of the power of @code{define_expand}:
5314
 
5315
@smallexample
5316
(define_expand "zero_extendhisi2"
5317
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "")
5318
        (const_int 0))
5319
   (set (strict_low_part
5320
          (subreg:HI
5321
            (match_dup 0)
5322
            0))
5323
        (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" ""))]
5324
  ""
5325
  "operands[1] = make_safe_from (operands[1], operands[0]);")
5326
@end smallexample
5327
 
5328
@noindent
5329
@findex make_safe_from
5330
Here two RTL insns are generated, one to clear the entire output operand
5331
and the other to copy the input operand into its low half.  This sequence
5332
is incorrect if the input operand refers to [the old value of] the output
5333
operand, so the preparation statement makes sure this isn't so.  The
5334
function @code{make_safe_from} copies the @code{operands[1]} into a
5335
temporary register if it refers to @code{operands[0]}.  It does this
5336
by emitting another RTL insn.
5337
 
5338
Finally, a third example shows the use of an internal operand.
5339
Zero-extension on the SPUR chip is done by @code{and}-ing the result
5340
against a halfword mask.  But this mask cannot be represented by a
5341
@code{const_int} because the constant value is too large to be legitimate
5342
on this machine.  So it must be copied into a register with
5343
@code{force_reg} and then the register used in the @code{and}.
5344
 
5345
@smallexample
5346
(define_expand "zero_extendhisi2"
5347
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5348
        (and:SI (subreg:SI
5349
                  (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "")
5350
                  0)
5351
                (match_dup 2)))]
5352
  ""
5353
  "operands[2]
5354
     = force_reg (SImode, GEN_INT (65535)); ")
5355
@end smallexample
5356
 
5357
@emph{Note:} If the @code{define_expand} is used to serve a
5358
standard binary or unary arithmetic operation or a bit-field operation,
5359
then the last insn it generates must not be a @code{code_label},
5360
@code{barrier} or @code{note}.  It must be an @code{insn},
5361
@code{jump_insn} or @code{call_insn}.  If you don't need a real insn
5362
at the end, emit an insn to copy the result of the operation into
5363
itself.  Such an insn will generate no code, but it can avoid problems
5364
in the compiler.
5365
 
5366
@end ifset
5367
@ifset INTERNALS
5368
@node Insn Splitting
5369
@section Defining How to Split Instructions
5370
@cindex insn splitting
5371
@cindex instruction splitting
5372
@cindex splitting instructions
5373
 
5374
There are two cases where you should specify how to split a pattern
5375
into multiple insns.  On machines that have instructions requiring
5376
delay slots (@pxref{Delay Slots}) or that have instructions whose
5377
output is not available for multiple cycles (@pxref{Processor pipeline
5378
description}), the compiler phases that optimize these cases need to
5379
be able to move insns into one-instruction delay slots.  However, some
5380
insns may generate more than one machine instruction.  These insns
5381
cannot be placed into a delay slot.
5382
 
5383
Often you can rewrite the single insn as a list of individual insns,
5384
each corresponding to one machine instruction.  The disadvantage of
5385
doing so is that it will cause the compilation to be slower and require
5386
more space.  If the resulting insns are too complex, it may also
5387
suppress some optimizations.  The compiler splits the insn if there is a
5388
reason to believe that it might improve instruction or delay slot
5389
scheduling.
5390
 
5391
The insn combiner phase also splits putative insns.  If three insns are
5392
merged into one insn with a complex expression that cannot be matched by
5393
some @code{define_insn} pattern, the combiner phase attempts to split
5394
the complex pattern into two insns that are recognized.  Usually it can
5395
break the complex pattern into two patterns by splitting out some
5396
subexpression.  However, in some other cases, such as performing an
5397
addition of a large constant in two insns on a RISC machine, the way to
5398
split the addition into two insns is machine-dependent.
5399
 
5400
@findex define_split
5401
The @code{define_split} definition tells the compiler how to split a
5402
complex insn into several simpler insns.  It looks like this:
5403
 
5404
@smallexample
5405
(define_split
5406
  [@var{insn-pattern}]
5407
  "@var{condition}"
5408
  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
5409
   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
5410
   @dots{}]
5411
  "@var{preparation-statements}")
5412
@end smallexample
5413
 
5414
@var{insn-pattern} is a pattern that needs to be split and
5415
@var{condition} is the final condition to be tested, as in a
5416
@code{define_insn}.  When an insn matching @var{insn-pattern} and
5417
satisfying @var{condition} is found, it is replaced in the insn list
5418
with the insns given by @var{new-insn-pattern-1},
5419
@var{new-insn-pattern-2}, etc.
5420
 
5421
The @var{preparation-statements} are similar to those statements that
5422
are specified for @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
5423
and are executed before the new RTL is generated to prepare for the
5424
generated code or emit some insns whose pattern is not fixed.  Unlike
5425
those in @code{define_expand}, however, these statements must not
5426
generate any new pseudo-registers.  Once reload has completed, they also
5427
must not allocate any space in the stack frame.
5428
 
5429
Patterns are matched against @var{insn-pattern} in two different
5430
circumstances.  If an insn needs to be split for delay slot scheduling
5431
or insn scheduling, the insn is already known to be valid, which means
5432
that it must have been matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if
5433
@code{reload_completed} is nonzero, is known to satisfy the constraints
5434
of that @code{define_insn}.  In that case, the new insn patterns must
5435
also be insns that are matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if
5436
@code{reload_completed} is nonzero, must also satisfy the constraints
5437
of those definitions.
5438
 
5439
As an example of this usage of @code{define_split}, consider the following
5440
example from @file{a29k.md}, which splits a @code{sign_extend} from
5441
@code{HImode} to @code{SImode} into a pair of shift insns:
5442
 
5443
@smallexample
5444
(define_split
5445
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "")
5446
        (sign_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")))]
5447
  ""
5448
  [(set (match_dup 0)
5449
        (ashift:SI (match_dup 1)
5450
                   (const_int 16)))
5451
   (set (match_dup 0)
5452
        (ashiftrt:SI (match_dup 0)
5453
                     (const_int 16)))]
5454
  "
5455
@{ operands[1] = gen_lowpart (SImode, operands[1]); @}")
5456
@end smallexample
5457
 
5458
When the combiner phase tries to split an insn pattern, it is always the
5459
case that the pattern is @emph{not} matched by any @code{define_insn}.
5460
The combiner pass first tries to split a single @code{set} expression
5461
and then the same @code{set} expression inside a @code{parallel}, but
5462
followed by a @code{clobber} of a pseudo-reg to use as a scratch
5463
register.  In these cases, the combiner expects exactly two new insn
5464
patterns to be generated.  It will verify that these patterns match some
5465
@code{define_insn} definitions, so you need not do this test in the
5466
@code{define_split} (of course, there is no point in writing a
5467
@code{define_split} that will never produce insns that match).
5468
 
5469
Here is an example of this use of @code{define_split}, taken from
5470
@file{rs6000.md}:
5471
 
5472
@smallexample
5473
(define_split
5474
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "")
5475
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")
5476
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "non_add_cint_operand" "")))]
5477
  ""
5478
  [(set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 3)))
5479
   (set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4)))]
5480
"
5481
@{
5482
  int low = INTVAL (operands[2]) & 0xffff;
5483
  int high = (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) >> 16;
5484
 
5485
  if (low & 0x8000)
5486
    high++, low |= 0xffff0000;
5487
 
5488
  operands[3] = GEN_INT (high << 16);
5489
  operands[4] = GEN_INT (low);
5490
@}")
5491
@end smallexample
5492
 
5493
Here the predicate @code{non_add_cint_operand} matches any
5494
@code{const_int} that is @emph{not} a valid operand of a single add
5495
insn.  The add with the smaller displacement is written so that it
5496
can be substituted into the address of a subsequent operation.
5497
 
5498
An example that uses a scratch register, from the same file, generates
5499
an equality comparison of a register and a large constant:
5500
 
5501
@smallexample
5502
(define_split
5503
  [(set (match_operand:CC 0 "cc_reg_operand" "")
5504
        (compare:CC (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")
5505
                    (match_operand:SI 2 "non_short_cint_operand" "")))
5506
   (clobber (match_operand:SI 3 "gen_reg_operand" ""))]
5507
  "find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)
5508
   && (GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == EQ
5509
       || GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == NE)"
5510
  [(set (match_dup 3) (xor:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 4)))
5511
   (set (match_dup 0) (compare:CC (match_dup 3) (match_dup 5)))]
5512
  "
5513
@{
5514
  /* @r{Get the constant we are comparing against, C, and see what it
5515
     looks like sign-extended to 16 bits.  Then see what constant
5516
     could be XOR'ed with C to get the sign-extended value.}  */
5517
 
5518
  int c = INTVAL (operands[2]);
5519
  int sextc = (c << 16) >> 16;
5520
  int xorv = c ^ sextc;
5521
 
5522
  operands[4] = GEN_INT (xorv);
5523
  operands[5] = GEN_INT (sextc);
5524
@}")
5525
@end smallexample
5526
 
5527
To avoid confusion, don't write a single @code{define_split} that
5528
accepts some insns that match some @code{define_insn} as well as some
5529
insns that don't.  Instead, write two separate @code{define_split}
5530
definitions, one for the insns that are valid and one for the insns that
5531
are not valid.
5532
 
5533
The splitter is allowed to split jump instructions into sequence of
5534
jumps or create new jumps in while splitting non-jump instructions.  As
5535
the central flowgraph and branch prediction information needs to be updated,
5536
several restriction apply.
5537
 
5538
Splitting of jump instruction into sequence that over by another jump
5539
instruction is always valid, as compiler expect identical behavior of new
5540
jump.  When new sequence contains multiple jump instructions or new labels,
5541
more assistance is needed.  Splitter is required to create only unconditional
5542
jumps, or simple conditional jump instructions.  Additionally it must attach a
5543
@code{REG_BR_PROB} note to each conditional jump.  A global variable
5544
@code{split_branch_probability} holds the probability of the original branch in case
5545
it was an simple conditional jump, @minus{}1 otherwise.  To simplify
5546
recomputing of edge frequencies, the new sequence is required to have only
5547
forward jumps to the newly created labels.
5548
 
5549
@findex define_insn_and_split
5550
For the common case where the pattern of a define_split exactly matches the
5551
pattern of a define_insn, use @code{define_insn_and_split}.  It looks like
5552
this:
5553
 
5554
@smallexample
5555
(define_insn_and_split
5556
  [@var{insn-pattern}]
5557
  "@var{condition}"
5558
  "@var{output-template}"
5559
  "@var{split-condition}"
5560
  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
5561
   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
5562
   @dots{}]
5563
  "@var{preparation-statements}"
5564
  [@var{insn-attributes}])
5565
 
5566
@end smallexample
5567
 
5568
@var{insn-pattern}, @var{condition}, @var{output-template}, and
5569
@var{insn-attributes} are used as in @code{define_insn}.  The
5570
@var{new-insn-pattern} vector and the @var{preparation-statements} are used as
5571
in a @code{define_split}.  The @var{split-condition} is also used as in
5572
@code{define_split}, with the additional behavior that if the condition starts
5573
with @samp{&&}, the condition used for the split will be the constructed as a
5574
logical ``and'' of the split condition with the insn condition.  For example,
5575
from i386.md:
5576
 
5577
@smallexample
5578
(define_insn_and_split "zero_extendhisi2_and"
5579
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=r")
5580
     (zero_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "0")))
5581
   (clobber (reg:CC 17))]
5582
  "TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size"
5583
  "#"
5584
  "&& reload_completed"
5585
  [(parallel [(set (match_dup 0)
5586
                   (and:SI (match_dup 0) (const_int 65535)))
5587
              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
5588
  ""
5589
  [(set_attr "type" "alu1")])
5590
 
5591
@end smallexample
5592
 
5593
In this case, the actual split condition will be
5594
@samp{TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size && reload_completed}.
5595
 
5596
The @code{define_insn_and_split} construction provides exactly the same
5597
functionality as two separate @code{define_insn} and @code{define_split}
5598
patterns.  It exists for compactness, and as a maintenance tool to prevent
5599
having to ensure the two patterns' templates match.
5600
 
5601
@end ifset
5602
@ifset INTERNALS
5603
@node Including Patterns
5604
@section Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions.
5605
@cindex insn includes
5606
 
5607
@findex include
5608
The @code{include} pattern tells the compiler tools where to
5609
look for patterns that are in files other than in the file
5610
@file{.md}.  This is used only at build time and there is no preprocessing allowed.
5611
 
5612
It looks like:
5613
 
5614
@smallexample
5615
 
5616
(include
5617
  @var{pathname})
5618
@end smallexample
5619
 
5620
For example:
5621
 
5622
@smallexample
5623
 
5624
(include "filestuff")
5625
 
5626
@end smallexample
5627
 
5628
Where @var{pathname} is a string that specifies the location of the file,
5629
specifies the include file to be in @file{gcc/config/target/filestuff}.  The
5630
directory @file{gcc/config/target} is regarded as the default directory.
5631
 
5632
 
5633
Machine descriptions may be split up into smaller more manageable subsections
5634
and placed into subdirectories.
5635
 
5636
By specifying:
5637
 
5638
@smallexample
5639
 
5640
(include "BOGUS/filestuff")
5641
 
5642
@end smallexample
5643
 
5644
the include file is specified to be in @file{gcc/config/@var{target}/BOGUS/filestuff}.
5645
 
5646
Specifying an absolute path for the include file such as;
5647
@smallexample
5648
 
5649
(include "/u2/BOGUS/filestuff")
5650
 
5651
@end smallexample
5652
is permitted but is not encouraged.
5653
 
5654
@subsection RTL Generation Tool Options for Directory Search
5655
@cindex directory options .md
5656
@cindex options, directory search
5657
@cindex search options
5658
 
5659
The @option{-I@var{dir}} option specifies directories to search for machine descriptions.
5660
For example:
5661
 
5662
@smallexample
5663
 
5664
genrecog -I/p1/abc/proc1 -I/p2/abcd/pro2 target.md
5665
 
5666
@end smallexample
5667
 
5668
 
5669
Add the directory @var{dir} to the head of the list of directories to be
5670
searched for header files.  This can be used to override a system machine definition
5671
file, substituting your own version, since these directories are
5672
searched before the default machine description file directories.  If you use more than
5673
one @option{-I} option, the directories are scanned in left-to-right
5674
order; the standard default directory come after.
5675
 
5676
 
5677
@end ifset
5678
@ifset INTERNALS
5679
@node Peephole Definitions
5680
@section Machine-Specific Peephole Optimizers
5681
@cindex peephole optimizer definitions
5682
@cindex defining peephole optimizers
5683
 
5684
In addition to instruction patterns the @file{md} file may contain
5685
definitions of machine-specific peephole optimizations.
5686
 
5687
The combiner does not notice certain peephole optimizations when the data
5688
flow in the program does not suggest that it should try them.  For example,
5689
sometimes two consecutive insns related in purpose can be combined even
5690
though the second one does not appear to use a register computed in the
5691
first one.  A machine-specific peephole optimizer can detect such
5692
opportunities.
5693
 
5694
There are two forms of peephole definitions that may be used.  The
5695
original @code{define_peephole} is run at assembly output time to
5696
match insns and substitute assembly text.  Use of @code{define_peephole}
5697
is deprecated.
5698
 
5699
A newer @code{define_peephole2} matches insns and substitutes new
5700
insns.  The @code{peephole2} pass is run after register allocation
5701
but before scheduling, which may result in much better code for
5702
targets that do scheduling.
5703
 
5704
@menu
5705
* define_peephole::     RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers
5706
* define_peephole2::    RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers
5707
@end menu
5708
 
5709
@end ifset
5710
@ifset INTERNALS
5711
@node define_peephole
5712
@subsection RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers
5713
@findex define_peephole
5714
 
5715
@need 1000
5716
A definition looks like this:
5717
 
5718
@smallexample
5719
(define_peephole
5720
  [@var{insn-pattern-1}
5721
   @var{insn-pattern-2}
5722
   @dots{}]
5723
  "@var{condition}"
5724
  "@var{template}"
5725
  "@var{optional-insn-attributes}")
5726
@end smallexample
5727
 
5728
@noindent
5729
The last string operand may be omitted if you are not using any
5730
machine-specific information in this machine description.  If present,
5731
it must obey the same rules as in a @code{define_insn}.
5732
 
5733
In this skeleton, @var{insn-pattern-1} and so on are patterns to match
5734
consecutive insns.  The optimization applies to a sequence of insns when
5735
@var{insn-pattern-1} matches the first one, @var{insn-pattern-2} matches
5736
the next, and so on.
5737
 
5738
Each of the insns matched by a peephole must also match a
5739
@code{define_insn}.  Peepholes are checked only at the last stage just
5740
before code generation, and only optionally.  Therefore, any insn which
5741
would match a peephole but no @code{define_insn} will cause a crash in code
5742
generation in an unoptimized compilation, or at various optimization
5743
stages.
5744
 
5745
The operands of the insns are matched with @code{match_operands},
5746
@code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup}, as usual.  What is not
5747
usual is that the operand numbers apply to all the insn patterns in the
5748
definition.  So, you can check for identical operands in two insns by
5749
using @code{match_operand} in one insn and @code{match_dup} in the
5750
other.
5751
 
5752
The operand constraints used in @code{match_operand} patterns do not have
5753
any direct effect on the applicability of the peephole, but they will
5754
be validated afterward, so make sure your constraints are general enough
5755
to apply whenever the peephole matches.  If the peephole matches
5756
but the constraints are not satisfied, the compiler will crash.
5757
 
5758
It is safe to omit constraints in all the operands of the peephole; or
5759
you can write constraints which serve as a double-check on the criteria
5760
previously tested.
5761
 
5762
Once a sequence of insns matches the patterns, the @var{condition} is
5763
checked.  This is a C expression which makes the final decision whether to
5764
perform the optimization (we do so if the expression is nonzero).  If
5765
@var{condition} is omitted (in other words, the string is empty) then the
5766
optimization is applied to every sequence of insns that matches the
5767
patterns.
5768
 
5769
The defined peephole optimizations are applied after register allocation
5770
is complete.  Therefore, the peephole definition can check which
5771
operands have ended up in which kinds of registers, just by looking at
5772
the operands.
5773
 
5774
@findex prev_active_insn
5775
The way to refer to the operands in @var{condition} is to write
5776
@code{operands[@var{i}]} for operand number @var{i} (as matched by
5777
@code{(match_operand @var{i} @dots{})}).  Use the variable @code{insn}
5778
to refer to the last of the insns being matched; use
5779
@code{prev_active_insn} to find the preceding insns.
5780
 
5781
@findex dead_or_set_p
5782
When optimizing computations with intermediate results, you can use
5783
@var{condition} to match only when the intermediate results are not used
5784
elsewhere.  Use the C expression @code{dead_or_set_p (@var{insn},
5785
@var{op})}, where @var{insn} is the insn in which you expect the value
5786
to be used for the last time (from the value of @code{insn}, together
5787
with use of @code{prev_nonnote_insn}), and @var{op} is the intermediate
5788
value (from @code{operands[@var{i}]}).
5789
 
5790
Applying the optimization means replacing the sequence of insns with one
5791
new insn.  The @var{template} controls ultimate output of assembler code
5792
for this combined insn.  It works exactly like the template of a
5793
@code{define_insn}.  Operand numbers in this template are the same ones
5794
used in matching the original sequence of insns.
5795
 
5796
The result of a defined peephole optimizer does not need to match any of
5797
the insn patterns in the machine description; it does not even have an
5798
opportunity to match them.  The peephole optimizer definition itself serves
5799
as the insn pattern to control how the insn is output.
5800
 
5801
Defined peephole optimizers are run as assembler code is being output,
5802
so the insns they produce are never combined or rearranged in any way.
5803
 
5804
Here is an example, taken from the 68000 machine description:
5805
 
5806
@smallexample
5807
(define_peephole
5808
  [(set (reg:SI 15) (plus:SI (reg:SI 15) (const_int 4)))
5809
   (set (match_operand:DF 0 "register_operand" "=f")
5810
        (match_operand:DF 1 "register_operand" "ad"))]
5811
  "FP_REG_P (operands[0]) && ! FP_REG_P (operands[1])"
5812
@{
5813
  rtx xoperands[2];
5814
  xoperands[1] = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (operands[1]) + 1);
5815
#ifdef MOTOROLA
5816
  output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,(sp)", xoperands);
5817
  output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,-(sp)", operands);
5818
  return "fmove.d (sp)+,%0";
5819
#else
5820
  output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@", xoperands);
5821
  output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@-", operands);
5822
  return "fmoved sp@@+,%0";
5823
#endif
5824
@})
5825
@end smallexample
5826
 
5827
@need 1000
5828
The effect of this optimization is to change
5829
 
5830
@smallexample
5831
@group
5832
jbsr _foobar
5833
addql #4,sp
5834
movel d1,sp@@-
5835
movel d0,sp@@-
5836
fmoved sp@@+,fp0
5837
@end group
5838
@end smallexample
5839
 
5840
@noindent
5841
into
5842
 
5843
@smallexample
5844
@group
5845
jbsr _foobar
5846
movel d1,sp@@
5847
movel d0,sp@@-
5848
fmoved sp@@+,fp0
5849
@end group
5850
@end smallexample
5851
 
5852
@ignore
5853
@findex CC_REVERSED
5854
If a peephole matches a sequence including one or more jump insns, you must
5855
take account of the flags such as @code{CC_REVERSED} which specify that the
5856
condition codes are represented in an unusual manner.  The compiler
5857
automatically alters any ordinary conditional jumps which occur in such
5858
situations, but the compiler cannot alter jumps which have been replaced by
5859
peephole optimizations.  So it is up to you to alter the assembler code
5860
that the peephole produces.  Supply C code to write the assembler output,
5861
and in this C code check the condition code status flags and change the
5862
assembler code as appropriate.
5863
@end ignore
5864
 
5865
@var{insn-pattern-1} and so on look @emph{almost} like the second
5866
operand of @code{define_insn}.  There is one important difference: the
5867
second operand of @code{define_insn} consists of one or more RTX's
5868
enclosed in square brackets.  Usually, there is only one: then the same
5869
action can be written as an element of a @code{define_peephole}.  But
5870
when there are multiple actions in a @code{define_insn}, they are
5871
implicitly enclosed in a @code{parallel}.  Then you must explicitly
5872
write the @code{parallel}, and the square brackets within it, in the
5873
@code{define_peephole}.  Thus, if an insn pattern looks like this,
5874
 
5875
@smallexample
5876
(define_insn "divmodsi4"
5877
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d")
5878
        (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
5879
                (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK")))
5880
   (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d")
5881
        (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))]
5882
  "TARGET_68020"
5883
  "divsl%.l %2,%3:%0")
5884
@end smallexample
5885
 
5886
@noindent
5887
then the way to mention this insn in a peephole is as follows:
5888
 
5889
@smallexample
5890
(define_peephole
5891
  [@dots{}
5892
   (parallel
5893
    [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d")
5894
          (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
5895
                  (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK")))
5896
     (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d")
5897
          (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))])
5898
   @dots{}]
5899
  @dots{})
5900
@end smallexample
5901
 
5902
@end ifset
5903
@ifset INTERNALS
5904
@node define_peephole2
5905
@subsection RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers
5906
@findex define_peephole2
5907
 
5908
The @code{define_peephole2} definition tells the compiler how to
5909
substitute one sequence of instructions for another sequence,
5910
what additional scratch registers may be needed and what their
5911
lifetimes must be.
5912
 
5913
@smallexample
5914
(define_peephole2
5915
  [@var{insn-pattern-1}
5916
   @var{insn-pattern-2}
5917
   @dots{}]
5918
  "@var{condition}"
5919
  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
5920
   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
5921
   @dots{}]
5922
  "@var{preparation-statements}")
5923
@end smallexample
5924
 
5925
The definition is almost identical to @code{define_split}
5926
(@pxref{Insn Splitting}) except that the pattern to match is not a
5927
single instruction, but a sequence of instructions.
5928
 
5929
It is possible to request additional scratch registers for use in the
5930
output template.  If appropriate registers are not free, the pattern
5931
will simply not match.
5932
 
5933
@findex match_scratch
5934
@findex match_dup
5935
Scratch registers are requested with a @code{match_scratch} pattern at
5936
the top level of the input pattern.  The allocated register (initially) will
5937
be dead at the point requested within the original sequence.  If the scratch
5938
is used at more than a single point, a @code{match_dup} pattern at the
5939
top level of the input pattern marks the last position in the input sequence
5940
at which the register must be available.
5941
 
5942
Here is an example from the IA-32 machine description:
5943
 
5944
@smallexample
5945
(define_peephole2
5946
  [(match_scratch:SI 2 "r")
5947
   (parallel [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5948
                   (match_operator:SI 3 "arith_or_logical_operator"
5949
                     [(match_dup 0)
5950
                      (match_operand:SI 1 "memory_operand" "")]))
5951
              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
5952
  "! optimize_size && ! TARGET_READ_MODIFY"
5953
  [(set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 1))
5954
   (parallel [(set (match_dup 0)
5955
                   (match_op_dup 3 [(match_dup 0) (match_dup 2)]))
5956
              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
5957
  "")
5958
@end smallexample
5959
 
5960
@noindent
5961
This pattern tries to split a load from its use in the hopes that we'll be
5962
able to schedule around the memory load latency.  It allocates a single
5963
@code{SImode} register of class @code{GENERAL_REGS} (@code{"r"}) that needs
5964
to be live only at the point just before the arithmetic.
5965
 
5966
A real example requiring extended scratch lifetimes is harder to come by,
5967
so here's a silly made-up example:
5968
 
5969
@smallexample
5970
(define_peephole2
5971
  [(match_scratch:SI 4 "r")
5972
   (set (match_operand:SI 0 "" "") (match_operand:SI 1 "" ""))
5973
   (set (match_operand:SI 2 "" "") (match_dup 1))
5974
   (match_dup 4)
5975
   (set (match_operand:SI 3 "" "") (match_dup 1))]
5976
  "/* @r{determine 1 does not overlap 0 and 2} */"
5977
  [(set (match_dup 4) (match_dup 1))
5978
   (set (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4))
5979
   (set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 4))]
5980
   (set (match_dup 3) (match_dup 4))]
5981
  "")
5982
@end smallexample
5983
 
5984
@noindent
5985
If we had not added the @code{(match_dup 4)} in the middle of the input
5986
sequence, it might have been the case that the register we chose at the
5987
beginning of the sequence is killed by the first or second @code{set}.
5988
 
5989
@end ifset
5990
@ifset INTERNALS
5991
@node Insn Attributes
5992
@section Instruction Attributes
5993
@cindex insn attributes
5994
@cindex instruction attributes
5995
 
5996
In addition to describing the instruction supported by the target machine,
5997
the @file{md} file also defines a group of @dfn{attributes} and a set of
5998
values for each.  Every generated insn is assigned a value for each attribute.
5999
One possible attribute would be the effect that the insn has on the machine's
6000
condition code.  This attribute can then be used by @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}
6001
to track the condition codes.
6002
 
6003
@menu
6004
* Defining Attributes:: Specifying attributes and their values.
6005
* Expressions::         Valid expressions for attribute values.
6006
* Tagging Insns::       Assigning attribute values to insns.
6007
* Attr Example::        An example of assigning attributes.
6008
* Insn Lengths::        Computing the length of insns.
6009
* Constant Attributes:: Defining attributes that are constant.
6010
* Delay Slots::         Defining delay slots required for a machine.
6011
* Processor pipeline description:: Specifying information for insn scheduling.
6012
@end menu
6013
 
6014
@end ifset
6015
@ifset INTERNALS
6016
@node Defining Attributes
6017
@subsection Defining Attributes and their Values
6018
@cindex defining attributes and their values
6019
@cindex attributes, defining
6020
 
6021
@findex define_attr
6022
The @code{define_attr} expression is used to define each attribute required
6023
by the target machine.  It looks like:
6024
 
6025
@smallexample
6026
(define_attr @var{name} @var{list-of-values} @var{default})
6027
@end smallexample
6028
 
6029
@var{name} is a string specifying the name of the attribute being defined.
6030
 
6031
@var{list-of-values} is either a string that specifies a comma-separated
6032
list of values that can be assigned to the attribute, or a null string to
6033
indicate that the attribute takes numeric values.
6034
 
6035
@var{default} is an attribute expression that gives the value of this
6036
attribute for insns that match patterns whose definition does not include
6037
an explicit value for this attribute.  @xref{Attr Example}, for more
6038
information on the handling of defaults.  @xref{Constant Attributes},
6039
for information on attributes that do not depend on any particular insn.
6040
 
6041
@findex insn-attr.h
6042
For each defined attribute, a number of definitions are written to the
6043
@file{insn-attr.h} file.  For cases where an explicit set of values is
6044
specified for an attribute, the following are defined:
6045
 
6046
@itemize @bullet
6047
@item
6048
A @samp{#define} is written for the symbol @samp{HAVE_ATTR_@var{name}}.
6049
 
6050
@item
6051
An enumerated class is defined for @samp{attr_@var{name}} with
6052
elements of the form @samp{@var{upper-name}_@var{upper-value}} where
6053
the attribute name and value are first converted to uppercase.
6054
 
6055
@item
6056
A function @samp{get_attr_@var{name}} is defined that is passed an insn and
6057
returns the attribute value for that insn.
6058
@end itemize
6059
 
6060
For example, if the following is present in the @file{md} file:
6061
 
6062
@smallexample
6063
(define_attr "type" "branch,fp,load,store,arith" @dots{})
6064
@end smallexample
6065
 
6066
@noindent
6067
the following lines will be written to the file @file{insn-attr.h}.
6068
 
6069
@smallexample
6070
#define HAVE_ATTR_type
6071
enum attr_type @{TYPE_BRANCH, TYPE_FP, TYPE_LOAD,
6072
                 TYPE_STORE, TYPE_ARITH@};
6073
extern enum attr_type get_attr_type ();
6074
@end smallexample
6075
 
6076
If the attribute takes numeric values, no @code{enum} type will be
6077
defined and the function to obtain the attribute's value will return
6078
@code{int}.
6079
 
6080
@end ifset
6081
@ifset INTERNALS
6082
@node Expressions
6083
@subsection Attribute Expressions
6084
@cindex attribute expressions
6085
 
6086
RTL expressions used to define attributes use the codes described above
6087
plus a few specific to attribute definitions, to be discussed below.
6088
Attribute value expressions must have one of the following forms:
6089
 
6090
@table @code
6091
@cindex @code{const_int} and attributes
6092
@item (const_int @var{i})
6093
The integer @var{i} specifies the value of a numeric attribute.  @var{i}
6094
must be non-negative.
6095
 
6096
The value of a numeric attribute can be specified either with a
6097
@code{const_int}, or as an integer represented as a string in
6098
@code{const_string}, @code{eq_attr} (see below), @code{attr},
6099
@code{symbol_ref}, simple arithmetic expressions, and @code{set_attr}
6100
overrides on specific instructions (@pxref{Tagging Insns}).
6101
 
6102
@cindex @code{const_string} and attributes
6103
@item (const_string @var{value})
6104
The string @var{value} specifies a constant attribute value.
6105
If @var{value} is specified as @samp{"*"}, it means that the default value of
6106
the attribute is to be used for the insn containing this expression.
6107
@samp{"*"} obviously cannot be used in the @var{default} expression
6108
of a @code{define_attr}.
6109
 
6110
If the attribute whose value is being specified is numeric, @var{value}
6111
must be a string containing a non-negative integer (normally
6112
@code{const_int} would be used in this case).  Otherwise, it must
6113
contain one of the valid values for the attribute.
6114
 
6115
@cindex @code{if_then_else} and attributes
6116
@item (if_then_else @var{test} @var{true-value} @var{false-value})
6117
@var{test} specifies an attribute test, whose format is defined below.
6118
The value of this expression is @var{true-value} if @var{test} is true,
6119
otherwise it is @var{false-value}.
6120
 
6121
@cindex @code{cond} and attributes
6122
@item (cond [@var{test1} @var{value1} @dots{}] @var{default})
6123
The first operand of this expression is a vector containing an even
6124
number of expressions and consisting of pairs of @var{test} and @var{value}
6125
expressions.  The value of the @code{cond} expression is that of the
6126
@var{value} corresponding to the first true @var{test} expression.  If
6127
none of the @var{test} expressions are true, the value of the @code{cond}
6128
expression is that of the @var{default} expression.
6129
@end table
6130
 
6131
@var{test} expressions can have one of the following forms:
6132
 
6133
@table @code
6134
@cindex @code{const_int} and attribute tests
6135
@item (const_int @var{i})
6136
This test is true if @var{i} is nonzero and false otherwise.
6137
 
6138
@cindex @code{not} and attributes
6139
@cindex @code{ior} and attributes
6140
@cindex @code{and} and attributes
6141
@item (not @var{test})
6142
@itemx (ior @var{test1} @var{test2})
6143
@itemx (and @var{test1} @var{test2})
6144
These tests are true if the indicated logical function is true.
6145
 
6146
@cindex @code{match_operand} and attributes
6147
@item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{pred} @var{constraints})
6148
This test is true if operand @var{n} of the insn whose attribute value
6149
is being determined has mode @var{m} (this part of the test is ignored
6150
if @var{m} is @code{VOIDmode}) and the function specified by the string
6151
@var{pred} returns a nonzero value when passed operand @var{n} and mode
6152
@var{m} (this part of the test is ignored if @var{pred} is the null
6153
string).
6154
 
6155
The @var{constraints} operand is ignored and should be the null string.
6156
 
6157
@cindex @code{le} and attributes
6158
@cindex @code{leu} and attributes
6159
@cindex @code{lt} and attributes
6160
@cindex @code{gt} and attributes
6161
@cindex @code{gtu} and attributes
6162
@cindex @code{ge} and attributes
6163
@cindex @code{geu} and attributes
6164
@cindex @code{ne} and attributes
6165
@cindex @code{eq} and attributes
6166
@cindex @code{plus} and attributes
6167
@cindex @code{minus} and attributes
6168
@cindex @code{mult} and attributes
6169
@cindex @code{div} and attributes
6170
@cindex @code{mod} and attributes
6171
@cindex @code{abs} and attributes
6172
@cindex @code{neg} and attributes
6173
@cindex @code{ashift} and attributes
6174
@cindex @code{lshiftrt} and attributes
6175
@cindex @code{ashiftrt} and attributes
6176
@item (le @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6177
@itemx (leu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6178
@itemx (lt @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6179
@itemx (ltu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6180
@itemx (gt @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6181
@itemx (gtu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6182
@itemx (ge @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6183
@itemx (geu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6184
@itemx (ne @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6185
@itemx (eq @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6186
These tests are true if the indicated comparison of the two arithmetic
6187
expressions is true.  Arithmetic expressions are formed with
6188
@code{plus}, @code{minus}, @code{mult}, @code{div}, @code{mod},
6189
@code{abs}, @code{neg}, @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor}, @code{not},
6190
@code{ashift}, @code{lshiftrt}, and @code{ashiftrt} expressions.
6191
 
6192
@findex get_attr
6193
@code{const_int} and @code{symbol_ref} are always valid terms (@pxref{Insn
6194
Lengths},for additional forms).  @code{symbol_ref} is a string
6195
denoting a C expression that yields an @code{int} when evaluated by the
6196
@samp{get_attr_@dots{}} routine.  It should normally be a global
6197
variable.
6198
 
6199
@findex eq_attr
6200
@item (eq_attr @var{name} @var{value})
6201
@var{name} is a string specifying the name of an attribute.
6202
 
6203
@var{value} is a string that is either a valid value for attribute
6204
@var{name}, a comma-separated list of values, or @samp{!} followed by a
6205
value or list.  If @var{value} does not begin with a @samp{!}, this
6206
test is true if the value of the @var{name} attribute of the current
6207
insn is in the list specified by @var{value}.  If @var{value} begins
6208
with a @samp{!}, this test is true if the attribute's value is
6209
@emph{not} in the specified list.
6210
 
6211
For example,
6212
 
6213
@smallexample
6214
(eq_attr "type" "load,store")
6215
@end smallexample
6216
 
6217
@noindent
6218
is equivalent to
6219
 
6220
@smallexample
6221
(ior (eq_attr "type" "load") (eq_attr "type" "store"))
6222
@end smallexample
6223
 
6224
If @var{name} specifies an attribute of @samp{alternative}, it refers to the
6225
value of the compiler variable @code{which_alternative}
6226
(@pxref{Output Statement}) and the values must be small integers.  For
6227
example,
6228
 
6229
@smallexample
6230
(eq_attr "alternative" "2,3")
6231
@end smallexample
6232
 
6233
@noindent
6234
is equivalent to
6235
 
6236
@smallexample
6237
(ior (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 2))
6238
     (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 3)))
6239
@end smallexample
6240
 
6241
Note that, for most attributes, an @code{eq_attr} test is simplified in cases
6242
where the value of the attribute being tested is known for all insns matching
6243
a particular pattern.  This is by far the most common case.
6244
 
6245
@findex attr_flag
6246
@item (attr_flag @var{name})
6247
The value of an @code{attr_flag} expression is true if the flag
6248
specified by @var{name} is true for the @code{insn} currently being
6249
scheduled.
6250
 
6251
@var{name} is a string specifying one of a fixed set of flags to test.
6252
Test the flags @code{forward} and @code{backward} to determine the
6253
direction of a conditional branch.  Test the flags @code{very_likely},
6254
@code{likely}, @code{very_unlikely}, and @code{unlikely} to determine
6255
if a conditional branch is expected to be taken.
6256
 
6257
If the @code{very_likely} flag is true, then the @code{likely} flag is also
6258
true.  Likewise for the @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags.
6259
 
6260
This example describes a conditional branch delay slot which
6261
can be nullified for forward branches that are taken (annul-true) or
6262
for backward branches which are not taken (annul-false).
6263
 
6264
@smallexample
6265
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "cbranch")
6266
  [(eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
6267
   (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
6268
        (attr_flag "forward"))
6269
   (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
6270
        (attr_flag "backward"))])
6271
@end smallexample
6272
 
6273
The @code{forward} and @code{backward} flags are false if the current
6274
@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
6275
 
6276
The @code{very_likely} and @code{likely} flags are true if the
6277
@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
6278
The @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags are false if the
6279
@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
6280
 
6281
@code{attr_flag} is only used during delay slot scheduling and has no
6282
meaning to other passes of the compiler.
6283
 
6284
@findex attr
6285
@item (attr @var{name})
6286
The value of another attribute is returned.  This is most useful
6287
for numeric attributes, as @code{eq_attr} and @code{attr_flag}
6288
produce more efficient code for non-numeric attributes.
6289
@end table
6290
 
6291
@end ifset
6292
@ifset INTERNALS
6293
@node Tagging Insns
6294
@subsection Assigning Attribute Values to Insns
6295
@cindex tagging insns
6296
@cindex assigning attribute values to insns
6297
 
6298
The value assigned to an attribute of an insn is primarily determined by
6299
which pattern is matched by that insn (or which @code{define_peephole}
6300
generated it).  Every @code{define_insn} and @code{define_peephole} can
6301
have an optional last argument to specify the values of attributes for
6302
matching insns.  The value of any attribute not specified in a particular
6303
insn is set to the default value for that attribute, as specified in its
6304
@code{define_attr}.  Extensive use of default values for attributes
6305
permits the specification of the values for only one or two attributes
6306
in the definition of most insn patterns, as seen in the example in the
6307
next section.
6308
 
6309
The optional last argument of @code{define_insn} and
6310
@code{define_peephole} is a vector of expressions, each of which defines
6311
the value for a single attribute.  The most general way of assigning an
6312
attribute's value is to use a @code{set} expression whose first operand is an
6313
@code{attr} expression giving the name of the attribute being set.  The
6314
second operand of the @code{set} is an attribute expression
6315
(@pxref{Expressions}) giving the value of the attribute.
6316
 
6317
When the attribute value depends on the @samp{alternative} attribute
6318
(i.e., which is the applicable alternative in the constraint of the
6319
insn), the @code{set_attr_alternative} expression can be used.  It
6320
allows the specification of a vector of attribute expressions, one for
6321
each alternative.
6322
 
6323
@findex set_attr
6324
When the generality of arbitrary attribute expressions is not required,
6325
the simpler @code{set_attr} expression can be used, which allows
6326
specifying a string giving either a single attribute value or a list
6327
of attribute values, one for each alternative.
6328
 
6329
The form of each of the above specifications is shown below.  In each case,
6330
@var{name} is a string specifying the attribute to be set.
6331
 
6332
@table @code
6333
@item (set_attr @var{name} @var{value-string})
6334
@var{value-string} is either a string giving the desired attribute value,
6335
or a string containing a comma-separated list giving the values for
6336
succeeding alternatives.  The number of elements must match the number
6337
of alternatives in the constraint of the insn pattern.
6338
 
6339
Note that it may be useful to specify @samp{*} for some alternative, in
6340
which case the attribute will assume its default value for insns matching
6341
that alternative.
6342
 
6343
@findex set_attr_alternative
6344
@item (set_attr_alternative @var{name} [@var{value1} @var{value2} @dots{}])
6345
Depending on the alternative of the insn, the value will be one of the
6346
specified values.  This is a shorthand for using a @code{cond} with
6347
tests on the @samp{alternative} attribute.
6348
 
6349
@findex attr
6350
@item (set (attr @var{name}) @var{value})
6351
The first operand of this @code{set} must be the special RTL expression
6352
@code{attr}, whose sole operand is a string giving the name of the
6353
attribute being set.  @var{value} is the value of the attribute.
6354
@end table
6355
 
6356
The following shows three different ways of representing the same
6357
attribute value specification:
6358
 
6359
@smallexample
6360
(set_attr "type" "load,store,arith")
6361
 
6362
(set_attr_alternative "type"
6363
                      [(const_string "load") (const_string "store")
6364
                       (const_string "arith")])
6365
 
6366
(set (attr "type")
6367
     (cond [(eq_attr "alternative" "1") (const_string "load")
6368
            (eq_attr "alternative" "2") (const_string "store")]
6369
           (const_string "arith")))
6370
@end smallexample
6371
 
6372
@need 1000
6373
@findex define_asm_attributes
6374
The @code{define_asm_attributes} expression provides a mechanism to
6375
specify the attributes assigned to insns produced from an @code{asm}
6376
statement.  It has the form:
6377
 
6378
@smallexample
6379
(define_asm_attributes [@var{attr-sets}])
6380
@end smallexample
6381
 
6382
@noindent
6383
where @var{attr-sets} is specified the same as for both the
6384
@code{define_insn} and the @code{define_peephole} expressions.
6385
 
6386
These values will typically be the ``worst case'' attribute values.  For
6387
example, they might indicate that the condition code will be clobbered.
6388
 
6389
A specification for a @code{length} attribute is handled specially.  The
6390
way to compute the length of an @code{asm} insn is to multiply the
6391
length specified in the expression @code{define_asm_attributes} by the
6392
number of machine instructions specified in the @code{asm} statement,
6393
determined by counting the number of semicolons and newlines in the
6394
string.  Therefore, the value of the @code{length} attribute specified
6395
in a @code{define_asm_attributes} should be the maximum possible length
6396
of a single machine instruction.
6397
 
6398
@end ifset
6399
@ifset INTERNALS
6400
@node Attr Example
6401
@subsection Example of Attribute Specifications
6402
@cindex attribute specifications example
6403
@cindex attribute specifications
6404
 
6405
The judicious use of defaulting is important in the efficient use of
6406
insn attributes.  Typically, insns are divided into @dfn{types} and an
6407
attribute, customarily called @code{type}, is used to represent this
6408
value.  This attribute is normally used only to define the default value
6409
for other attributes.  An example will clarify this usage.
6410
 
6411
Assume we have a RISC machine with a condition code and in which only
6412
full-word operations are performed in registers.  Let us assume that we
6413
can divide all insns into loads, stores, (integer) arithmetic
6414
operations, floating point operations, and branches.
6415
 
6416
Here we will concern ourselves with determining the effect of an insn on
6417
the condition code and will limit ourselves to the following possible
6418
effects:  The condition code can be set unpredictably (clobbered), not
6419
be changed, be set to agree with the results of the operation, or only
6420
changed if the item previously set into the condition code has been
6421
modified.
6422
 
6423
Here is part of a sample @file{md} file for such a machine:
6424
 
6425
@smallexample
6426
(define_attr "type" "load,store,arith,fp,branch" (const_string "arith"))
6427
 
6428
(define_attr "cc" "clobber,unchanged,set,change0"
6429
             (cond [(eq_attr "type" "load")
6430
                        (const_string "change0")
6431
                    (eq_attr "type" "store,branch")
6432
                        (const_string "unchanged")
6433
                    (eq_attr "type" "arith")
6434
                        (if_then_else (match_operand:SI 0 "" "")
6435
                                      (const_string "set")
6436
                                      (const_string "clobber"))]
6437
                   (const_string "clobber")))
6438
 
6439
(define_insn ""
6440
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,r,m")
6441
        (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r,m,r"))]
6442
  ""
6443
  "@@
6444
   move %0,%1
6445
   load %0,%1
6446
   store %0,%1"
6447
  [(set_attr "type" "arith,load,store")])
6448
@end smallexample
6449
 
6450
Note that we assume in the above example that arithmetic operations
6451
performed on quantities smaller than a machine word clobber the condition
6452
code since they will set the condition code to a value corresponding to the
6453
full-word result.
6454
 
6455
@end ifset
6456
@ifset INTERNALS
6457
@node Insn Lengths
6458
@subsection Computing the Length of an Insn
6459
@cindex insn lengths, computing
6460
@cindex computing the length of an insn
6461
 
6462
For many machines, multiple types of branch instructions are provided, each
6463
for different length branch displacements.  In most cases, the assembler
6464
will choose the correct instruction to use.  However, when the assembler
6465
cannot do so, GCC can when a special attribute, the @code{length}
6466
attribute, is defined.  This attribute must be defined to have numeric
6467
values by specifying a null string in its @code{define_attr}.
6468
 
6469
In the case of the @code{length} attribute, two additional forms of
6470
arithmetic terms are allowed in test expressions:
6471
 
6472
@table @code
6473
@cindex @code{match_dup} and attributes
6474
@item (match_dup @var{n})
6475
This refers to the address of operand @var{n} of the current insn, which
6476
must be a @code{label_ref}.
6477
 
6478
@cindex @code{pc} and attributes
6479
@item (pc)
6480
This refers to the address of the @emph{current} insn.  It might have
6481
been more consistent with other usage to make this the address of the
6482
@emph{next} insn but this would be confusing because the length of the
6483
current insn is to be computed.
6484
@end table
6485
 
6486
@cindex @code{addr_vec}, length of
6487
@cindex @code{addr_diff_vec}, length of
6488
For normal insns, the length will be determined by value of the
6489
@code{length} attribute.  In the case of @code{addr_vec} and
6490
@code{addr_diff_vec} insn patterns, the length is computed as
6491
the number of vectors multiplied by the size of each vector.
6492
 
6493
Lengths are measured in addressable storage units (bytes).
6494
 
6495
The following macros can be used to refine the length computation:
6496
 
6497
@table @code
6498
@findex ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH
6499
@item ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH (@var{insn}, @var{length})
6500
If defined, modifies the length assigned to instruction @var{insn} as a
6501
function of the context in which it is used.  @var{length} is an lvalue
6502
that contains the initially computed length of the insn and should be
6503
updated with the correct length of the insn.
6504
 
6505
This macro will normally not be required.  A case in which it is
6506
required is the ROMP@.  On this machine, the size of an @code{addr_vec}
6507
insn must be increased by two to compensate for the fact that alignment
6508
may be required.
6509
@end table
6510
 
6511
@findex get_attr_length
6512
The routine that returns @code{get_attr_length} (the value of the
6513
@code{length} attribute) can be used by the output routine to
6514
determine the form of the branch instruction to be written, as the
6515
example below illustrates.
6516
 
6517
As an example of the specification of variable-length branches, consider
6518
the IBM 360.  If we adopt the convention that a register will be set to
6519
the starting address of a function, we can jump to labels within 4k of
6520
the start using a four-byte instruction.  Otherwise, we need a six-byte
6521
sequence to load the address from memory and then branch to it.
6522
 
6523
On such a machine, a pattern for a branch instruction might be specified
6524
as follows:
6525
 
6526
@smallexample
6527
(define_insn "jump"
6528
  [(set (pc)
6529
        (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" "")))]
6530
  ""
6531
@{
6532
   return (get_attr_length (insn) == 4
6533
           ? "b %l0" : "l r15,=a(%l0); br r15");
6534
@}
6535
  [(set (attr "length")
6536
        (if_then_else (lt (match_dup 0) (const_int 4096))
6537
                      (const_int 4)
6538
                      (const_int 6)))])
6539
@end smallexample
6540
 
6541
@end ifset
6542
@ifset INTERNALS
6543
@node Constant Attributes
6544
@subsection Constant Attributes
6545
@cindex constant attributes
6546
 
6547
A special form of @code{define_attr}, where the expression for the
6548
default value is a @code{const} expression, indicates an attribute that
6549
is constant for a given run of the compiler.  Constant attributes may be
6550
used to specify which variety of processor is used.  For example,
6551
 
6552
@smallexample
6553
(define_attr "cpu" "m88100,m88110,m88000"
6554
 (const
6555
  (cond [(symbol_ref "TARGET_88100") (const_string "m88100")
6556
         (symbol_ref "TARGET_88110") (const_string "m88110")]
6557
        (const_string "m88000"))))
6558
 
6559
(define_attr "memory" "fast,slow"
6560
 (const
6561
  (if_then_else (symbol_ref "TARGET_FAST_MEM")
6562
                (const_string "fast")
6563
                (const_string "slow"))))
6564
@end smallexample
6565
 
6566
The routine generated for constant attributes has no parameters as it
6567
does not depend on any particular insn.  RTL expressions used to define
6568
the value of a constant attribute may use the @code{symbol_ref} form,
6569
but may not use either the @code{match_operand} form or @code{eq_attr}
6570
forms involving insn attributes.
6571
 
6572
@end ifset
6573
@ifset INTERNALS
6574
@node Delay Slots
6575
@subsection Delay Slot Scheduling
6576
@cindex delay slots, defining
6577
 
6578
The insn attribute mechanism can be used to specify the requirements for
6579
delay slots, if any, on a target machine.  An instruction is said to
6580
require a @dfn{delay slot} if some instructions that are physically
6581
after the instruction are executed as if they were located before it.
6582
Classic examples are branch and call instructions, which often execute
6583
the following instruction before the branch or call is performed.
6584
 
6585
On some machines, conditional branch instructions can optionally
6586
@dfn{annul} instructions in the delay slot.  This means that the
6587
instruction will not be executed for certain branch outcomes.  Both
6588
instructions that annul if the branch is true and instructions that
6589
annul if the branch is false are supported.
6590
 
6591
Delay slot scheduling differs from instruction scheduling in that
6592
determining whether an instruction needs a delay slot is dependent only
6593
on the type of instruction being generated, not on data flow between the
6594
instructions.  See the next section for a discussion of data-dependent
6595
instruction scheduling.
6596
 
6597
@findex define_delay
6598
The requirement of an insn needing one or more delay slots is indicated
6599
via the @code{define_delay} expression.  It has the following form:
6600
 
6601
@smallexample
6602
(define_delay @var{test}
6603
              [@var{delay-1} @var{annul-true-1} @var{annul-false-1}
6604
               @var{delay-2} @var{annul-true-2} @var{annul-false-2}
6605
               @dots{}])
6606
@end smallexample
6607
 
6608
@var{test} is an attribute test that indicates whether this
6609
@code{define_delay} applies to a particular insn.  If so, the number of
6610
required delay slots is determined by the length of the vector specified
6611
as the second argument.  An insn placed in delay slot @var{n} must
6612
satisfy attribute test @var{delay-n}.  @var{annul-true-n} is an
6613
attribute test that specifies which insns may be annulled if the branch
6614
is true.  Similarly, @var{annul-false-n} specifies which insns in the
6615
delay slot may be annulled if the branch is false.  If annulling is not
6616
supported for that delay slot, @code{(nil)} should be coded.
6617
 
6618
For example, in the common case where branch and call insns require
6619
a single delay slot, which may contain any insn other than a branch or
6620
call, the following would be placed in the @file{md} file:
6621
 
6622
@smallexample
6623
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch,call")
6624
              [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)])
6625
@end smallexample
6626
 
6627
Multiple @code{define_delay} expressions may be specified.  In this
6628
case, each such expression specifies different delay slot requirements
6629
and there must be no insn for which tests in two @code{define_delay}
6630
expressions are both true.
6631
 
6632
For example, if we have a machine that requires one delay slot for branches
6633
but two for calls,  no delay slot can contain a branch or call insn,
6634
and any valid insn in the delay slot for the branch can be annulled if the
6635
branch is true, we might represent this as follows:
6636
 
6637
@smallexample
6638
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch")
6639
   [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call")
6640
    (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call")
6641
    (nil)])
6642
 
6643
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "call")
6644
              [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)
6645
               (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)])
6646
@end smallexample
6647
@c the above is *still* too long.  --mew 4feb93
6648
 
6649
@end ifset
6650
@ifset INTERNALS
6651
@node Processor pipeline description
6652
@subsection Specifying processor pipeline description
6653
@cindex processor pipeline description
6654
@cindex processor functional units
6655
@cindex instruction latency time
6656
@cindex interlock delays
6657
@cindex data dependence delays
6658
@cindex reservation delays
6659
@cindex pipeline hazard recognizer
6660
@cindex automaton based pipeline description
6661
@cindex regular expressions
6662
@cindex deterministic finite state automaton
6663
@cindex automaton based scheduler
6664
@cindex RISC
6665
@cindex VLIW
6666
 
6667
To achieve better performance, most modern processors
6668
(super-pipelined, superscalar @acronym{RISC}, and @acronym{VLIW}
6669
processors) have many @dfn{functional units} on which several
6670
instructions can be executed simultaneously.  An instruction starts
6671
execution if its issue conditions are satisfied.  If not, the
6672
instruction is stalled until its conditions are satisfied.  Such
6673
@dfn{interlock (pipeline) delay} causes interruption of the fetching
6674
of successor instructions (or demands nop instructions, e.g.@: for some
6675
MIPS processors).
6676
 
6677
There are two major kinds of interlock delays in modern processors.
6678
The first one is a data dependence delay determining @dfn{instruction
6679
latency time}.  The instruction execution is not started until all
6680
source data have been evaluated by prior instructions (there are more
6681
complex cases when the instruction execution starts even when the data
6682
are not available but will be ready in given time after the
6683
instruction execution start).  Taking the data dependence delays into
6684
account is simple.  The data dependence (true, output, and
6685
anti-dependence) delay between two instructions is given by a
6686
constant.  In most cases this approach is adequate.  The second kind
6687
of interlock delays is a reservation delay.  The reservation delay
6688
means that two instructions under execution will be in need of shared
6689
processors resources, i.e.@: buses, internal registers, and/or
6690
functional units, which are reserved for some time.  Taking this kind
6691
of delay into account is complex especially for modern @acronym{RISC}
6692
processors.
6693
 
6694
The task of exploiting more processor parallelism is solved by an
6695
instruction scheduler.  For a better solution to this problem, the
6696
instruction scheduler has to have an adequate description of the
6697
processor parallelism (or @dfn{pipeline description}).  GCC
6698
machine descriptions describe processor parallelism and functional
6699
unit reservations for groups of instructions with the aid of
6700
@dfn{regular expressions}.
6701
 
6702
The GCC instruction scheduler uses a @dfn{pipeline hazard recognizer} to
6703
figure out the possibility of the instruction issue by the processor
6704
on a given simulated processor cycle.  The pipeline hazard recognizer is
6705
automatically generated from the processor pipeline description.  The
6706
pipeline hazard recognizer generated from the machine description
6707
is based on a deterministic finite state automaton (@acronym{DFA}):
6708
the instruction issue is possible if there is a transition from one
6709
automaton state to another one.  This algorithm is very fast, and
6710
furthermore, its speed is not dependent on processor
6711
complexity@footnote{However, the size of the automaton depends on
6712
  processor complexity.  To limit this effect, machine descriptions
6713
  can split orthogonal parts of the machine description among several
6714
  automata: but then, since each of these must be stepped independently,
6715
  this does cause a small decrease in the algorithm's performance.}.
6716
 
6717
@cindex automaton based pipeline description
6718
The rest of this section describes the directives that constitute
6719
an automaton-based processor pipeline description.  The order of
6720
these constructions within the machine description file is not
6721
important.
6722
 
6723
@findex define_automaton
6724
@cindex pipeline hazard recognizer
6725
The following optional construction describes names of automata
6726
generated and used for the pipeline hazards recognition.  Sometimes
6727
the generated finite state automaton used by the pipeline hazard
6728
recognizer is large.  If we use more than one automaton and bind functional
6729
units to the automata, the total size of the automata is usually
6730
less than the size of the single automaton.  If there is no one such
6731
construction, only one finite state automaton is generated.
6732
 
6733
@smallexample
6734
(define_automaton @var{automata-names})
6735
@end smallexample
6736
 
6737
@var{automata-names} is a string giving names of the automata.  The
6738
names are separated by commas.  All the automata should have unique names.
6739
The automaton name is used in the constructions @code{define_cpu_unit} and
6740
@code{define_query_cpu_unit}.
6741
 
6742
@findex define_cpu_unit
6743
@cindex processor functional units
6744
Each processor functional unit used in the description of instruction
6745
reservations should be described by the following construction.
6746
 
6747
@smallexample
6748
(define_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}])
6749
@end smallexample
6750
 
6751
@var{unit-names} is a string giving the names of the functional units
6752
separated by commas.  Don't use name @samp{nothing}, it is reserved
6753
for other goals.
6754
 
6755
@var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with
6756
which the unit is bound.  The automaton should be described in
6757
construction @code{define_automaton}.  You should give
6758
@dfn{automaton-name}, if there is a defined automaton.
6759
 
6760
The assignment of units to automata are constrained by the uses of the
6761
units in insn reservations.  The most important constraint is: if a
6762
unit reservation is present on a particular cycle of an alternative
6763
for an insn reservation, then some unit from the same automaton must
6764
be present on the same cycle for the other alternatives of the insn
6765
reservation.  The rest of the constraints are mentioned in the
6766
description of the subsequent constructions.
6767
 
6768
@findex define_query_cpu_unit
6769
@cindex querying function unit reservations
6770
The following construction describes CPU functional units analogously
6771
to @code{define_cpu_unit}.  The reservation of such units can be
6772
queried for an automaton state.  The instruction scheduler never
6773
queries reservation of functional units for given automaton state.  So
6774
as a rule, you don't need this construction.  This construction could
6775
be used for future code generation goals (e.g.@: to generate
6776
@acronym{VLIW} insn templates).
6777
 
6778
@smallexample
6779
(define_query_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}])
6780
@end smallexample
6781
 
6782
@var{unit-names} is a string giving names of the functional units
6783
separated by commas.
6784
 
6785
@var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with
6786
which the unit is bound.
6787
 
6788
@findex define_insn_reservation
6789
@cindex instruction latency time
6790
@cindex regular expressions
6791
@cindex data bypass
6792
The following construction is the major one to describe pipeline
6793
characteristics of an instruction.
6794
 
6795
@smallexample
6796
(define_insn_reservation @var{insn-name} @var{default_latency}
6797
                         @var{condition} @var{regexp})
6798
@end smallexample
6799
 
6800
@var{default_latency} is a number giving latency time of the
6801
instruction.  There is an important difference between the old
6802
description and the automaton based pipeline description.  The latency
6803
time is used for all dependencies when we use the old description.  In
6804
the automaton based pipeline description, the given latency time is only
6805
used for true dependencies.  The cost of anti-dependencies is always
6806
zero and the cost of output dependencies is the difference between
6807
latency times of the producing and consuming insns (if the difference
6808
is negative, the cost is considered to be zero).  You can always
6809
change the default costs for any description by using the target hook
6810
@code{TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST} (@pxref{Scheduling}).
6811
 
6812
@var{insn-name} is a string giving the internal name of the insn.  The
6813
internal names are used in constructions @code{define_bypass} and in
6814
the automaton description file generated for debugging.  The internal
6815
name has nothing in common with the names in @code{define_insn}.  It is a
6816
good practice to use insn classes described in the processor manual.
6817
 
6818
@var{condition} defines what RTL insns are described by this
6819
construction.  You should remember that you will be in trouble if
6820
@var{condition} for two or more different
6821
@code{define_insn_reservation} constructions is TRUE for an insn.  In
6822
this case what reservation will be used for the insn is not defined.
6823
Such cases are not checked during generation of the pipeline hazards
6824
recognizer because in general recognizing that two conditions may have
6825
the same value is quite difficult (especially if the conditions
6826
contain @code{symbol_ref}).  It is also not checked during the
6827
pipeline hazard recognizer work because it would slow down the
6828
recognizer considerably.
6829
 
6830
@var{regexp} is a string describing the reservation of the cpu's functional
6831
units by the instruction.  The reservations are described by a regular
6832
expression according to the following syntax:
6833
 
6834
@smallexample
6835
       regexp = regexp "," oneof
6836
              | oneof
6837
 
6838
       oneof = oneof "|" allof
6839
             | allof
6840
 
6841
       allof = allof "+" repeat
6842
             | repeat
6843
 
6844
       repeat = element "*" number
6845
              | element
6846
 
6847
       element = cpu_function_unit_name
6848
               | reservation_name
6849
               | result_name
6850
               | "nothing"
6851
               | "(" regexp ")"
6852
@end smallexample
6853
 
6854
@itemize @bullet
6855
@item
6856
@samp{,} is used for describing the start of the next cycle in
6857
the reservation.
6858
 
6859
@item
6860
@samp{|} is used for describing a reservation described by the first
6861
regular expression @strong{or} a reservation described by the second
6862
regular expression @strong{or} etc.
6863
 
6864
@item
6865
@samp{+} is used for describing a reservation described by the first
6866
regular expression @strong{and} a reservation described by the
6867
second regular expression @strong{and} etc.
6868
 
6869
@item
6870
@samp{*} is used for convenience and simply means a sequence in which
6871
the regular expression are repeated @var{number} times with cycle
6872
advancing (see @samp{,}).
6873
 
6874
@item
6875
@samp{cpu_function_unit_name} denotes reservation of the named
6876
functional unit.
6877
 
6878
@item
6879
@samp{reservation_name} --- see description of construction
6880
@samp{define_reservation}.
6881
 
6882
@item
6883
@samp{nothing} denotes no unit reservations.
6884
@end itemize
6885
 
6886
@findex define_reservation
6887
Sometimes unit reservations for different insns contain common parts.
6888
In such case, you can simplify the pipeline description by describing
6889
the common part by the following construction
6890
 
6891
@smallexample
6892
(define_reservation @var{reservation-name} @var{regexp})
6893
@end smallexample
6894
 
6895
@var{reservation-name} is a string giving name of @var{regexp}.
6896
Functional unit names and reservation names are in the same name
6897
space.  So the reservation names should be different from the
6898
functional unit names and can not be the reserved name @samp{nothing}.
6899
 
6900
@findex define_bypass
6901
@cindex instruction latency time
6902
@cindex data bypass
6903
The following construction is used to describe exceptions in the
6904
latency time for given instruction pair.  This is so called bypasses.
6905
 
6906
@smallexample
6907
(define_bypass @var{number} @var{out_insn_names} @var{in_insn_names}
6908
               [@var{guard}])
6909
@end smallexample
6910
 
6911
@var{number} defines when the result generated by the instructions
6912
given in string @var{out_insn_names} will be ready for the
6913
instructions given in string @var{in_insn_names}.  The instructions in
6914
the string are separated by commas.
6915
 
6916
@var{guard} is an optional string giving the name of a C function which
6917
defines an additional guard for the bypass.  The function will get the
6918
two insns as parameters.  If the function returns zero the bypass will
6919
be ignored for this case.  The additional guard is necessary to
6920
recognize complicated bypasses, e.g.@: when the consumer is only an address
6921
of insn @samp{store} (not a stored value).
6922
 
6923
@findex exclusion_set
6924
@findex presence_set
6925
@findex final_presence_set
6926
@findex absence_set
6927
@findex final_absence_set
6928
@cindex VLIW
6929
@cindex RISC
6930
The following five constructions are usually used to describe
6931
@acronym{VLIW} processors, or more precisely, to describe a placement
6932
of small instructions into @acronym{VLIW} instruction slots.  They
6933
can be used for @acronym{RISC} processors, too.
6934
 
6935
@smallexample
6936
(exclusion_set @var{unit-names} @var{unit-names})
6937
(presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
6938
(final_presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
6939
(absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
6940
(final_absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
6941
@end smallexample
6942
 
6943
@var{unit-names} is a string giving names of functional units
6944
separated by commas.
6945
 
6946
@var{patterns} is a string giving patterns of functional units
6947
separated by comma.  Currently pattern is one unit or units
6948
separated by white-spaces.
6949
 
6950
The first construction (@samp{exclusion_set}) means that each
6951
functional unit in the first string can not be reserved simultaneously
6952
with a unit whose name is in the second string and vice versa.  For
6953
example, the construction is useful for describing processors
6954
(e.g.@: some SPARC processors) with a fully pipelined floating point
6955
functional unit which can execute simultaneously only single floating
6956
point insns or only double floating point insns.
6957
 
6958
The second construction (@samp{presence_set}) means that each
6959
functional unit in the first string can not be reserved unless at
6960
least one of pattern of units whose names are in the second string is
6961
reserved.  This is an asymmetric relation.  For example, it is useful
6962
for description that @acronym{VLIW} @samp{slot1} is reserved after
6963
@samp{slot0} reservation.  We could describe it by the following
6964
construction
6965
 
6966
@smallexample
6967
(presence_set "slot1" "slot0")
6968
@end smallexample
6969
 
6970
Or @samp{slot1} is reserved only after @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0}
6971
reservation.  In this case we could write
6972
 
6973
@smallexample
6974
(presence_set "slot1" "slot0 b0")
6975
@end smallexample
6976
 
6977
The third construction (@samp{final_presence_set}) is analogous to
6978
@samp{presence_set}.  The difference between them is when checking is
6979
done.  When an instruction is issued in given automaton state
6980
reflecting all current and planned unit reservations, the automaton
6981
state is changed.  The first state is a source state, the second one
6982
is a result state.  Checking for @samp{presence_set} is done on the
6983
source state reservation, checking for @samp{final_presence_set} is
6984
done on the result reservation.  This construction is useful to
6985
describe a reservation which is actually two subsequent reservations.
6986
For example, if we use
6987
 
6988
@smallexample
6989
(presence_set "slot1" "slot0")
6990
@end smallexample
6991
 
6992
the following insn will be never issued (because @samp{slot1} requires
6993
@samp{slot0} which is absent in the source state).
6994
 
6995
@smallexample
6996
(define_reservation "insn_and_nop" "slot0 + slot1")
6997
@end smallexample
6998
 
6999
but it can be issued if we use analogous @samp{final_presence_set}.
7000
 
7001
The forth construction (@samp{absence_set}) means that each functional
7002
unit in the first string can be reserved only if each pattern of units
7003
whose names are in the second string is not reserved.  This is an
7004
asymmetric relation (actually @samp{exclusion_set} is analogous to
7005
this one but it is symmetric).  For example it might be useful in a
7006
@acronym{VLIW} description to say that @samp{slot0} cannot be reserved
7007
after either @samp{slot1} or @samp{slot2} have been reserved.  This
7008
can be described as:
7009
 
7010
@smallexample
7011
(absence_set "slot0" "slot1, slot2")
7012
@end smallexample
7013
 
7014
Or @samp{slot2} can not be reserved if @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0}
7015
are reserved or @samp{slot1} and unit @samp{b1} are reserved.  In
7016
this case we could write
7017
 
7018
@smallexample
7019
(absence_set "slot2" "slot0 b0, slot1 b1")
7020
@end smallexample
7021
 
7022
All functional units mentioned in a set should belong to the same
7023
automaton.
7024
 
7025
The last construction (@samp{final_absence_set}) is analogous to
7026
@samp{absence_set} but checking is done on the result (state)
7027
reservation.  See comments for @samp{final_presence_set}.
7028
 
7029
@findex automata_option
7030
@cindex deterministic finite state automaton
7031
@cindex nondeterministic finite state automaton
7032
@cindex finite state automaton minimization
7033
You can control the generator of the pipeline hazard recognizer with
7034
the following construction.
7035
 
7036
@smallexample
7037
(automata_option @var{options})
7038
@end smallexample
7039
 
7040
@var{options} is a string giving options which affect the generated
7041
code.  Currently there are the following options:
7042
 
7043
@itemize @bullet
7044
@item
7045
@dfn{no-minimization} makes no minimization of the automaton.  This is
7046
only worth to do when we are debugging the description and need to
7047
look more accurately at reservations of states.
7048
 
7049
@item
7050
@dfn{time} means printing additional time statistics about
7051
generation of automata.
7052
 
7053
@item
7054
@dfn{v} means a generation of the file describing the result automata.
7055
The file has suffix @samp{.dfa} and can be used for the description
7056
verification and debugging.
7057
 
7058
@item
7059
@dfn{w} means a generation of warning instead of error for
7060
non-critical errors.
7061
 
7062
@item
7063
@dfn{ndfa} makes nondeterministic finite state automata.  This affects
7064
the treatment of operator @samp{|} in the regular expressions.  The
7065
usual treatment of the operator is to try the first alternative and,
7066
if the reservation is not possible, the second alternative.  The
7067
nondeterministic treatment means trying all alternatives, some of them
7068
may be rejected by reservations in the subsequent insns.
7069
 
7070
@item
7071
@dfn{progress} means output of a progress bar showing how many states
7072
were generated so far for automaton being processed.  This is useful
7073
during debugging a @acronym{DFA} description.  If you see too many
7074
generated states, you could interrupt the generator of the pipeline
7075
hazard recognizer and try to figure out a reason for generation of the
7076
huge automaton.
7077
@end itemize
7078
 
7079
As an example, consider a superscalar @acronym{RISC} machine which can
7080
issue three insns (two integer insns and one floating point insn) on
7081
the cycle but can finish only two insns.  To describe this, we define
7082
the following functional units.
7083
 
7084
@smallexample
7085
(define_cpu_unit "i0_pipeline, i1_pipeline, f_pipeline")
7086
(define_cpu_unit "port0, port1")
7087
@end smallexample
7088
 
7089
All simple integer insns can be executed in any integer pipeline and
7090
their result is ready in two cycles.  The simple integer insns are
7091
issued into the first pipeline unless it is reserved, otherwise they
7092
are issued into the second pipeline.  Integer division and
7093
multiplication insns can be executed only in the second integer
7094
pipeline and their results are ready correspondingly in 8 and 4
7095
cycles.  The integer division is not pipelined, i.e.@: the subsequent
7096
integer division insn can not be issued until the current division
7097
insn finished.  Floating point insns are fully pipelined and their
7098
results are ready in 3 cycles.  Where the result of a floating point
7099
insn is used by an integer insn, an additional delay of one cycle is
7100
incurred.  To describe all of this we could specify
7101
 
7102
@smallexample
7103
(define_cpu_unit "div")
7104
 
7105
(define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int")
7106
                         "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), (port0 | port1)")
7107
 
7108
(define_insn_reservation "mult" 4 (eq_attr "type" "mult")
7109
                         "i1_pipeline, nothing*2, (port0 | port1)")
7110
 
7111
(define_insn_reservation "div" 8 (eq_attr "type" "div")
7112
                         "i1_pipeline, div*7, div + (port0 | port1)")
7113
 
7114
(define_insn_reservation "float" 3 (eq_attr "type" "float")
7115
                         "f_pipeline, nothing, (port0 | port1))
7116
 
7117
(define_bypass 4 "float" "simple,mult,div")
7118
@end smallexample
7119
 
7120
To simplify the description we could describe the following reservation
7121
 
7122
@smallexample
7123
(define_reservation "finish" "port0|port1")
7124
@end smallexample
7125
 
7126
and use it in all @code{define_insn_reservation} as in the following
7127
construction
7128
 
7129
@smallexample
7130
(define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int")
7131
                         "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), finish")
7132
@end smallexample
7133
 
7134
 
7135
@end ifset
7136
@ifset INTERNALS
7137
@node Conditional Execution
7138
@section Conditional Execution
7139
@cindex conditional execution
7140
@cindex predication
7141
 
7142
A number of architectures provide for some form of conditional
7143
execution, or predication.  The hallmark of this feature is the
7144
ability to nullify most of the instructions in the instruction set.
7145
When the instruction set is large and not entirely symmetric, it
7146
can be quite tedious to describe these forms directly in the
7147
@file{.md} file.  An alternative is the @code{define_cond_exec} template.
7148
 
7149
@findex define_cond_exec
7150
@smallexample
7151
(define_cond_exec
7152
  [@var{predicate-pattern}]
7153
  "@var{condition}"
7154
  "@var{output-template}")
7155
@end smallexample
7156
 
7157
@var{predicate-pattern} is the condition that must be true for the
7158
insn to be executed at runtime and should match a relational operator.
7159
One can use @code{match_operator} to match several relational operators
7160
at once.  Any @code{match_operand} operands must have no more than one
7161
alternative.
7162
 
7163
@var{condition} is a C expression that must be true for the generated
7164
pattern to match.
7165
 
7166
@findex current_insn_predicate
7167
@var{output-template} is a string similar to the @code{define_insn}
7168
output template (@pxref{Output Template}), except that the @samp{*}
7169
and @samp{@@} special cases do not apply.  This is only useful if the
7170
assembly text for the predicate is a simple prefix to the main insn.
7171
In order to handle the general case, there is a global variable
7172
@code{current_insn_predicate} that will contain the entire predicate
7173
if the current insn is predicated, and will otherwise be @code{NULL}.
7174
 
7175
When @code{define_cond_exec} is used, an implicit reference to
7176
the @code{predicable} instruction attribute is made.
7177
@xref{Insn Attributes}.  This attribute must be boolean (i.e.@: have
7178
exactly two elements in its @var{list-of-values}).  Further, it must
7179
not be used with complex expressions.  That is, the default and all
7180
uses in the insns must be a simple constant, not dependent on the
7181
alternative or anything else.
7182
 
7183
For each @code{define_insn} for which the @code{predicable}
7184
attribute is true, a new @code{define_insn} pattern will be
7185
generated that matches a predicated version of the instruction.
7186
For example,
7187
 
7188
@smallexample
7189
(define_insn "addsi"
7190
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r")
7191
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r")
7192
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r")))]
7193
  "@var{test1}"
7194
  "add %2,%1,%0")
7195
 
7196
(define_cond_exec
7197
  [(ne (match_operand:CC 0 "register_operand" "c")
7198
       (const_int 0))]
7199
  "@var{test2}"
7200
  "(%0)")
7201
@end smallexample
7202
 
7203
@noindent
7204
generates a new pattern
7205
 
7206
@smallexample
7207
(define_insn ""
7208
  [(cond_exec
7209
     (ne (match_operand:CC 3 "register_operand" "c") (const_int 0))
7210
     (set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r")
7211
          (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r")
7212
                   (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r"))))]
7213
  "(@var{test2}) && (@var{test1})"
7214
  "(%3) add %2,%1,%0")
7215
@end smallexample
7216
 
7217
@end ifset
7218
@ifset INTERNALS
7219
@node Constant Definitions
7220
@section Constant Definitions
7221
@cindex constant definitions
7222
@findex define_constants
7223
 
7224
Using literal constants inside instruction patterns reduces legibility and
7225
can be a maintenance problem.
7226
 
7227
To overcome this problem, you may use the @code{define_constants}
7228
expression.  It contains a vector of name-value pairs.  From that
7229
point on, wherever any of the names appears in the MD file, it is as
7230
if the corresponding value had been written instead.  You may use
7231
@code{define_constants} multiple times; each appearance adds more
7232
constants to the table.  It is an error to redefine a constant with
7233
a different value.
7234
 
7235
To come back to the a29k load multiple example, instead of
7236
 
7237
@smallexample
7238
(define_insn ""
7239
  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
7240
     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
7241
           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
7242
      (use (reg:SI 179))
7243
      (clobber (reg:SI 179))])]
7244
  ""
7245
  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
7246
@end smallexample
7247
 
7248
You could write:
7249
 
7250
@smallexample
7251
(define_constants [
7252
    (R_BP 177)
7253
    (R_FC 178)
7254
    (R_CR 179)
7255
    (R_Q  180)
7256
])
7257
 
7258
(define_insn ""
7259
  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
7260
     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
7261
           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
7262
      (use (reg:SI R_CR))
7263
      (clobber (reg:SI R_CR))])]
7264
  ""
7265
  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
7266
@end smallexample
7267
 
7268
The constants that are defined with a define_constant are also output
7269
in the insn-codes.h header file as #defines.
7270
@end ifset
7271
@ifset INTERNALS
7272
@node Macros
7273
@section Macros
7274
@cindex macros in @file{.md} files
7275
 
7276
Ports often need to define similar patterns for more than one machine
7277
mode or for more than one rtx code.  GCC provides some simple macro
7278
facilities to make this process easier.
7279
 
7280
@menu
7281
* Mode Macros::         Generating variations of patterns for different modes.
7282
* Code Macros::         Doing the same for codes.
7283
@end menu
7284
 
7285
@node Mode Macros
7286
@subsection Mode Macros
7287
@cindex mode macros in @file{.md} files
7288
 
7289
Ports often need to define similar patterns for two or more different modes.
7290
For example:
7291
 
7292
@itemize @bullet
7293
@item
7294
If a processor has hardware support for both single and double
7295
floating-point arithmetic, the @code{SFmode} patterns tend to be
7296
very similar to the @code{DFmode} ones.
7297
 
7298
@item
7299
If a port uses @code{SImode} pointers in one configuration and
7300
@code{DImode} pointers in another, it will usually have very similar
7301
@code{SImode} and @code{DImode} patterns for manipulating pointers.
7302
@end itemize
7303
 
7304
Mode macros allow several patterns to be instantiated from one
7305
@file{.md} file template.  They can be used with any type of
7306
rtx-based construct, such as a @code{define_insn},
7307
@code{define_split}, or @code{define_peephole2}.
7308
 
7309
@menu
7310
* Defining Mode Macros:: Defining a new mode macro.
7311
* Substitutions::        Combining mode macros with substitutions
7312
* Examples::             Examples
7313
@end menu
7314
 
7315
@node Defining Mode Macros
7316
@subsubsection Defining Mode Macros
7317
@findex define_mode_macro
7318
 
7319
The syntax for defining a mode macro is:
7320
 
7321
@smallexample
7322
(define_mode_macro @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{cond1}") ... (@var{moden} "@var{condn}")])
7323
@end smallexample
7324
 
7325
This allows subsequent @file{.md} file constructs to use the mode suffix
7326
@code{:@var{name}}.  Every construct that does so will be expanded
7327
@var{n} times, once with every use of @code{:@var{name}} replaced by
7328
@code{:@var{mode1}}, once with every use replaced by @code{:@var{mode2}},
7329
and so on.  In the expansion for a particular @var{modei}, every
7330
C condition will also require that @var{condi} be true.
7331
 
7332
For example:
7333
 
7334
@smallexample
7335
(define_mode_macro P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")])
7336
@end smallexample
7337
 
7338
defines a new mode suffix @code{:P}.  Every construct that uses
7339
@code{:P} will be expanded twice, once with every @code{:P} replaced
7340
by @code{:SI} and once with every @code{:P} replaced by @code{:DI}.
7341
The @code{:SI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == SImode} and
7342
the @code{:DI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == DImode}.
7343
 
7344
As with other @file{.md} conditions, an empty string is treated
7345
as ``always true''.  @code{(@var{mode} "")} can also be abbreviated
7346
to @code{@var{mode}}.  For example:
7347
 
7348
@smallexample
7349
(define_mode_macro GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")])
7350
@end smallexample
7351
 
7352
means that the @code{:DI} expansion only applies if @code{TARGET_64BIT}
7353
but that the @code{:SI} expansion has no such constraint.
7354
 
7355
Macros are applied in the order they are defined.  This can be
7356
significant if two macros are used in a construct that requires
7357
substitutions.  @xref{Substitutions}.
7358
 
7359
@node Substitutions
7360
@subsubsection Substitution in Mode Macros
7361
@findex define_mode_attr
7362
 
7363
If an @file{.md} file construct uses mode macros, each version of the
7364
construct will often need slightly different strings or modes.  For
7365
example:
7366
 
7367
@itemize @bullet
7368
@item
7369
When a @code{define_expand} defines several @code{add@var{m}3} patterns
7370
(@pxref{Standard Names}), each expander will need to use the
7371
appropriate mode name for @var{m}.
7372
 
7373
@item
7374
When a @code{define_insn} defines several instruction patterns,
7375
each instruction will often use a different assembler mnemonic.
7376
 
7377
@item
7378
When a @code{define_insn} requires operands with different modes,
7379
using a macro for one of the operand modes usually requires a specific
7380
mode for the other operand(s).
7381
@end itemize
7382
 
7383
GCC supports such variations through a system of ``mode attributes''.
7384
There are two standard attributes: @code{mode}, which is the name of
7385
the mode in lower case, and @code{MODE}, which is the same thing in
7386
upper case.  You can define other attributes using:
7387
 
7388
@smallexample
7389
(define_mode_attr @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{value1}") ... (@var{moden} "@var{valuen}")])
7390
@end smallexample
7391
 
7392
where @var{name} is the name of the attribute and @var{valuei}
7393
is the value associated with @var{modei}.
7394
 
7395
When GCC replaces some @var{:macro} with @var{:mode}, it will scan
7396
each string and mode in the pattern for sequences of the form
7397
@code{<@var{macro}:@var{attr}>}, where @var{attr} is the name of a
7398
mode attribute.  If the attribute is defined for @var{mode}, the whole
7399
@code{<...>} sequence will be replaced by the appropriate attribute
7400
value.
7401
 
7402
For example, suppose an @file{.md} file has:
7403
 
7404
@smallexample
7405
(define_mode_macro P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")])
7406
(define_mode_attr load [(SI "lw") (DI "ld")])
7407
@end smallexample
7408
 
7409
If one of the patterns that uses @code{:P} contains the string
7410
@code{"<P:load>\t%0,%1"}, the @code{SI} version of that pattern
7411
will use @code{"lw\t%0,%1"} and the @code{DI} version will use
7412
@code{"ld\t%0,%1"}.
7413
 
7414
Here is an example of using an attribute for a mode:
7415
 
7416
@smallexample
7417
(define_mode_macro LONG [SI DI])
7418
(define_mode_attr SHORT [(SI "HI") (DI "SI")])
7419
(define_insn ...
7420
  (sign_extend:LONG (match_operand:<LONG:SHORT> ...)) ...)
7421
@end smallexample
7422
 
7423
The @code{@var{macro}:} prefix may be omitted, in which case the
7424
substitution will be attempted for every macro expansion.
7425
 
7426
@node Examples
7427
@subsubsection Mode Macro Examples
7428
 
7429
Here is an example from the MIPS port.  It defines the following
7430
modes and attributes (among others):
7431
 
7432
@smallexample
7433
(define_mode_macro GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")])
7434
(define_mode_attr d [(SI "") (DI "d")])
7435
@end smallexample
7436
 
7437
and uses the following template to define both @code{subsi3}
7438
and @code{subdi3}:
7439
 
7440
@smallexample
7441
(define_insn "sub<mode>3"
7442
  [(set (match_operand:GPR 0 "register_operand" "=d")
7443
        (minus:GPR (match_operand:GPR 1 "register_operand" "d")
7444
                   (match_operand:GPR 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
7445
  ""
7446
  "<d>subu\t%0,%1,%2"
7447
  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
7448
   (set_attr "mode" "<MODE>")])
7449
@end smallexample
7450
 
7451
This is exactly equivalent to:
7452
 
7453
@smallexample
7454
(define_insn "subsi3"
7455
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=d")
7456
        (minus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "d")
7457
                  (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
7458
  ""
7459
  "subu\t%0,%1,%2"
7460
  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
7461
   (set_attr "mode" "SI")])
7462
 
7463
(define_insn "subdi3"
7464
  [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d")
7465
        (minus:DI (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" "d")
7466
                  (match_operand:DI 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
7467
  ""
7468
  "dsubu\t%0,%1,%2"
7469
  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
7470
   (set_attr "mode" "DI")])
7471
@end smallexample
7472
 
7473
@node Code Macros
7474
@subsection Code Macros
7475
@cindex code macros in @file{.md} files
7476
@findex define_code_macro
7477
@findex define_code_attr
7478
 
7479
Code macros operate in a similar way to mode macros.  @xref{Mode Macros}.
7480
 
7481
The construct:
7482
 
7483
@smallexample
7484
(define_code_macro @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{cond1}") ... (@var{coden} "@var{condn}")])
7485
@end smallexample
7486
 
7487
defines a pseudo rtx code @var{name} that can be instantiated as
7488
@var{codei} if condition @var{condi} is true.  Each @var{codei}
7489
must have the same rtx format.  @xref{RTL Classes}.
7490
 
7491
As with mode macros, each pattern that uses @var{name} will be
7492
expanded @var{n} times, once with all uses of @var{name} replaced by
7493
@var{code1}, once with all uses replaced by @var{code2}, and so on.
7494
@xref{Defining Mode Macros}.
7495
 
7496
It is possible to define attributes for codes as well as for modes.
7497
There are two standard code attributes: @code{code}, the name of the
7498
code in lower case, and @code{CODE}, the name of the code in upper case.
7499
Other attributes are defined using:
7500
 
7501
@smallexample
7502
(define_code_attr @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{value1}") ... (@var{coden} "@var{valuen}")])
7503
@end smallexample
7504
 
7505
Here's an example of code macros in action, taken from the MIPS port:
7506
 
7507
@smallexample
7508
(define_code_macro any_cond [unordered ordered unlt unge uneq ltgt unle ungt
7509
                             eq ne gt ge lt le gtu geu ltu leu])
7510
 
7511
(define_expand "b<code>"
7512
  [(set (pc)
7513
        (if_then_else (any_cond:CC (cc0)
7514
                                   (const_int 0))
7515
                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
7516
                      (pc)))]
7517
  ""
7518
@{
7519
  gen_conditional_branch (operands, <CODE>);
7520
  DONE;
7521
@})
7522
@end smallexample
7523
 
7524
This is equivalent to:
7525
 
7526
@smallexample
7527
(define_expand "bunordered"
7528
  [(set (pc)
7529
        (if_then_else (unordered:CC (cc0)
7530
                                    (const_int 0))
7531
                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
7532
                      (pc)))]
7533
  ""
7534
@{
7535
  gen_conditional_branch (operands, UNORDERED);
7536
  DONE;
7537
@})
7538
 
7539
(define_expand "bordered"
7540
  [(set (pc)
7541
        (if_then_else (ordered:CC (cc0)
7542
                                  (const_int 0))
7543
                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
7544
                      (pc)))]
7545
  ""
7546
@{
7547
  gen_conditional_branch (operands, ORDERED);
7548
  DONE;
7549
@})
7550
 
7551
...
7552
@end smallexample
7553
 
7554
@end ifset

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.